Mapk/erk kinase inhibitors

ABSTRACT

Compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, kits and methods are provided for use with MEK that comprise a compound selected from the group consisting of: wherein the variables are as defined herein.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds that may be used to inhibitMitogen-Activated Protein kinases (also known as MEK and MAPK/ERKkinases), such as Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase Kinase 1 (also knownas MAPKK1, MAPK/ERK Kinase 1, and MEK1) and Mitogen-Activated ProteinKinase Kinase 2 (also known as MAPKK2, MAPK/ERK Kinase 2, and MEK2), aswell as compositions of matter, kits and articles of manufacturecomprising these compounds. The invention also relates to methods forinhibiting MEK and/or ERK activity, and treatment methods usingcompounds according to the present invention. In addition, the inventionrelates to methods of making the compounds of the present invention, aswell as intermediates useful in such methods.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The mitogen activated protein kinase (MAPK) signaling pathways areinvolved in cellular events such as growth, differentiation and stressresponses (J. Biol. Chem. (1993) 268, 14553-14556). Four parallel MAPKpathways have been identified to date: ERK1/ERK2, JNK, p38 and ERK5.These pathways are linear kinase cascades in that MAPKKK phosphorylatesand activates MAPKK, and MAPKK phosphorylates and activates MAPK. Todate, seven MAPKK homologs (MEK1, MEK2, MKK3, MKK4/SEK, MEK5, MKK6, andMKK7) and four MAPK families (ERK1/2, JNK, p38, and ERK5) have beenidentified. Activation of these pathways regulates the activity of anumber of substrates through phosphorylation. These substrates include:transcription factors such as TCF, c-myc, ATF2 and the AP-1 components,fos and Jun; cell surface components EGF-R; cytosolic componentsincluding PHAS-I, p90^(rsk), cPLA₂ and c-Raf-1; and cytoskeletoncomponents such as tau and MAP2. MAPK signaling cascades are involved incontrolling cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation,apoptosis, and stress responses.

Of the known MAPK signaling pathways, the RAF-MEK-ERK pathway mediatesproliferative and anti-apoptotic signaling from growth factors andoncogenic factors such as Ras and Raf mutant phenotypes that promotetumor growth, progression, and metastasis. By virtue of its central rolein mediating the transmission of growth-promoting signals from multiplegrowth factor receptors, the RAF-MEK-ERK pathway provides moleculartargets with potentially broad therapeutic applications in, for example,cancerous and noon-cancerous hyperproliferative disorders,immunomodulation and inflammation.

MEK occupies a strategic downstream position in the RAF-MEK-ERK pathwaycatalyzing the phosphorylation of its MAPK substrates, ERK1 and ERK2.Anderson et al. “Requirement for integration of signals from twodistinct phosphorylation pathways for activation of MAP kinase.” Nature1990, v.343, pp. 651-653. In the ERK pathway, MAPKK corresponds with MEK(MAP kinase ERK Kinase) and the MAPK corresponds with ERK (ExtracellularRegulated Kinase). No substrates for MEK have been identified other thanERK1 and ERK2. Seger et al. “Purification and characterization ofmitogen-activated protein kinase activator(s) from epidermal growthfactor-stimulated A431 cells.” J. Biol. Chem., 1992, v. 267, pp.14373-14381. This tight selectivity, in addition to the unique abilityto act as a dual-specificity kinase, is consistent with MEK's centralrole in integration of signals into the MAPK pathway. MEK also appearsto associate strongly with MAP kinase prior to phosphorylating it,suggesting that phosphorylation of MAP kinase by MEK may require a priorstrong interaction between the two proteins. Both this requirement andthe unusual specificity of MEK are suggestive that it may have enoughdifference in its mechanism of action to other protein kinases thatselective inhibitors of MEK, possibly operating through allostericmechanisms rather than through the usual blockade of the ATP bindingsite, may be found.

Constitutive action of MAPKs has been reported in >30% of primary tumorcell lines including cell lines derived from colon, lung, breast,pancreas, ovary, and kidney. Hoshino et al. “Constitutive activation ofthe 41-/43-kDa mitogen-activated protein kinase signaling pathway inhuman tumors.” Oncogene, 1999, v. 18, pp. 813-822. Higher concentrationsof active MAPK/ERK (pMAPK/pERK) have been detected in tumor tissue ascompared to normal adjacent tissue. Sivaraman et al. “Hyperexpression ofmitogen-activated protein kinase in human breast cancer.” J. Clin.Invest., 1997, v. 99, pp. 1478-1483.

There is a continued need to find new therapeutic agents to treat humandiseases. The MAPK/ERK kinases, specifically but not limited to MEK1 andMEK2, are especially attractive targets for the discovery of newtherapeutics due to their important role in cancerous hyperproliferativedisorders (e.g., brain, lung, squamous cell, bladder, gastric,pancreatic, breast, head, neck, renal, kidney, ovarian, prostate,colorectal, prostate, colon, epidermoid, esophageal, testicular,gynecological or thyroid cancer; non-cancerous hyperproliferativedisorders (e.g., benign hyperplasia of the skin (e.g., psoriasis),restenosis, and benign prostatic hypertrophy (BPH)); pancreatitis;kidney disease; pain; preventing blastocyte implantation; treatingdiseases related to vasculogenesis or angiogenesis (e.g., tumorangiogenesis, acute and chronic inflammatory disease such as rheumatoidarthritis, atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, skin diseasessuch as psoriasis, excema, and scleroderma, diabetes, diabeticretinopathy, retinopathy of prematurity, age-related maculardegeneration, hemangioma, glioma, melanoma, Kaposi's sarcoma andovarian, breast, lung, pancreatic, prostate, colon and epidermoidcancer); asthma; neutrophil chemotaxis; septic shock; T-cell mediateddiseases where immune suppression would be of value (e.g., theprevention of organ transplant rejection, graft versus host disease,lupus erythematosus, multiple sclerosis, and rheumatoid arthritis);conditions where neutrophil influx drives tissue destruction (e.g.,reperfusion injury in myocardial infarction and stroke and inflammatoryarthritis); atherosclerosis; inhibition of keratinocyte responses togrowth factor cocktails; and other diseases.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds that have activity forinhibiting MAPK/ERK kinases. The present invention also providescompositions, articles of manufacture and kits comprising thesecompounds, as well as methods for inhibiting MEK and treatment methodsusing compounds according to the present invention. In addition, theinvention relates to methods of making the compounds of the presentinvention, as well as intermediates useful in such methods.

In one embodiment, a pharmaceutical composition is provided thatcomprises a MEK inhibitor according to the present invention as anactive ingredient. Pharmaceutical compositions according to theinvention may optionally comprise 0.001%-100% of one or more inhibitorsof this invention. These pharmaceutical compositions may be administeredor coadministered by a wide variety of routes, including for example,orally, parenterally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially,transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally,intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly,via local delivery (for example by catheter or stent), subcutaneously,intraadiposally, intraarticularly, or intrathecally. The compositionsmay also be administered or coadministered in slow release dosage forms.

The invention is also directed to kits and other articles of manufacturefor treating disease states associated with MEK.

In one embodiment, a kit is provided that comprises a compositioncomprising at least one MEK inhibitor of the present invention incombination with instructions. The instructions may indicate the diseasestate for which the composition is to be administered, storageinformation, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how toadminister the composition. The kit may also comprise packagingmaterials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housingthe composition. The kit may also optionally comprise additionalcomponents, such as syringes for administration of the composition. Thekit may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.

In another embodiment, an article of manufacture is provided thatcomprises a composition comprising at least one MEK inhibitor of thepresent invention in combination with packaging materials. The packagingmaterial may comprise a container for housing the composition. Thecontainer may optionally comprise a label indicating the disease statefor which the composition is to be administered, storage information,dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer thecomposition. The kit may also optionally comprise additional components,such as syringes for administration of the composition. The kit maycomprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.

Also provided are methods for preparing compounds, compositions and kitsaccording to the present invention. For example, several syntheticschemes are provided herein for synthesizing compounds according to thepresent invention.

Also provided are methods for using compounds, compositions, kits andarticles of manufacture according to the present invention.

In one embodiment, the compounds, compositions, kits and articles ofmanufacture are used to inhibit the activity of MEK and/or ERK. Inparticular, the compounds, compositions, kits and articles ofmanufacture can be used to inhibit the activity of MEK1. In addition,the compounds, compositions, kits and articles of manufacture can beused to inhibit the activity of MEK2. Further, the compounds,compositions, kits and articles of manufacture can be used to inhibitthe activity of ERK1. Also, the compounds, compositions, kits andarticles of manufacture can be used to inhibit the activity of ERK2.

In another embodiment, the compounds, compositions, kits and articles ofmanufacture are used to treat a disease state for which MEK and/or ERKpossess activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomologyof the disease state.

In another embodiment, a compound according to the present invention isadministered to a subject wherein MEK and/or ERK activity within thesubject is altered, preferably reduced.

In another embodiment, a prodrug of a compound according to the presentinvention is administered to a subject that is converted to the compoundin vivo where it inhibits MEK and/or ERK.

In another embodiment, a method is provided for treating a condition ina patient that is known to be mediated by MEK and/or ERK, or which isknown to be treated by MEK inhibitors, the method comprisingadministering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of acompound according to the present invention.

In another embodiment, a method is provided for using a compoundaccording to the present invention in order to manufacture a medicamentfor use in the treatment of a disease state that is known to be mediatedby MEK and/or ERK, or that is known to be treated by MEK inhibitors.

It is noted in regard to all of the above embodiments that the presentinvention is intended to encompass all pharmaceutically acceptableionized forms (e.g., salts) and solvates (e.g., hydrates) of thecompounds, regardless of whether such ionized forms and solvates arespecified since it is well know in the art to administer pharmaceuticalagents in an ionized or solvated form. It is also noted that unless aparticular stereochemistry is specified, recitation of a compound isintended to encompass all possible stereoisomers (e.g., enantiomers ordiastereomers depending on the number of chiral centers), independent ofwhether the compound is present as an individual isomer or a mixture ofisomers. Further, unless otherwise specified, recitation of a compoundis intended to encompass all possible resonance forms and tautomers.With regard to the claims, the language “compound comprising theformula” is intended to encompass the compound and all pharmaceuticallyacceptable ionized forms and solvates, all possible stereoisomers, andall possible resonance forms and tautomers unless otherwise specificallyspecified in the particular claim.

It is further noted that prodrugs may also be administered which arealtered in vivo and become a compound according to the presentinvention. The various methods of using the compounds of the presentinvention are intended, regardless of whether prodrug delivery isspecified, to encompass the administration of a prodrug that isconverted in vivo to a compound according to the present invention. Itis also noted that certain compounds of the present invention may bealtered in vivo prior to inhibit MEK and thus may themselves be prodrugsfor another compound. Such prodrugs of another compound may or may notthemselves independently have MEK and/or ERK inhibitory activity.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

FIG. 1 illustrates SEQ ID NOS: 1-6 referred to in this application.

DEFINITIONS

Unless otherwise stated, the following terms used in the specificationand claims shall have the following meanings for the purposes of thisApplication.

It is noted that, as used in the specification and the appended claims,the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unlessthe context clearly dictates otherwise. Further, definitions of standardchemistry terms may be found in reference works, including Carey andSundberg “ADVANCED ORGANIC CHEMISTRY 4^(TH) ED.” Vols. A (2000) and B(2001), Plenum Press, New York. Also, unless otherwise indicated,conventional methods of mass spectroscopy, NMR, HPLC, protein chemistry,biochemistry, recombinant DNA techniques and pharmacology, within theskill of the art are employed.

“Alicyclic” means a moiety comprising a non-aromatic ring structure.Alicyclic moieties may be saturated or partially unsaturated with one,two or more double or triple bonds. Alicyclic moieties may alsooptionally comprise heteroatoms such as nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur. Thenitrogen atoms can be optionally quaternerized or oxidized and thesulfur atoms can be optionally oxidized. Examples of alicyclic moietiesinclude, but are not limited to moieties with (C₃₋₈) rings such ascyclopropyl, cyclohexane, cyclopentane, cyclopentene, cyclopentadiene,cyclohexane, cyclohexene, cyclohexadiene, cycloheptane, cycloheptene,cycloheptadiene, cyclooctane, cyclooctene, and cyclooctadiene.

“Aliphatic” means a moiety characterized by a straight or branched chainarrangement of constituent carbon atoms and may be saturated orpartially unsaturated with one, two or more double or triple bonds.

“Alkenyl” means a straight or branched, carbon chain that contains atleast one carbon-carbon double bond (—CR═CR′— or CR═CR′R″, wherein R, R′and R″ are each independently hydrogen or further substituents).Examples of alkenyl include vinyl, allyl, isopropenyl, pentenyl,hexenyl, heptenyl, 1-propenyl, 2-butenyl, 2-methyl-2-butenyl, and thelike. In particular embodiments, “alkenyl,” either alone or representedalong with another radical, can be a (C₂₋₂₀)alkenyl, a (C₂₋₁₅)alkenyl, a(C₂₋₁₀)alkenyl, a (C₂₋₅)alkenyl or a (C₂₋₃)alkenyl. Alternatively,“alkenyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical, canbe a (C₂)alkenyl, a (C₃)alkenyl or a (C₄)alkenyl.

“Alkenylene” means a straight or branched, divalent carbon chain havingone or more carbon-carbon double bonds (—CR═CR′—, wherein R and R′ areeach independently hydrogen or further substituents). Examples ofalkenylene include ethene-1,2-diyl, propene-1,3-diyl,methylene-1,1-diyl, and the like. In particular embodiments,“alkenylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₂₋₂₀) alkenylene, a (C₂₋₁₅) alkenylene, a (C₂₋₁₀) alkenylene,a (C₂₋₅) alkenylene or a (C₂₋₃) alkenylene. Alternatively, “alkenylene,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C₂)alkenylene, a (C₃) alkenylene or a (C₄) alkenylene.

“Alkoxy” means an oxygen moiety having a further alkyl substituent. Thealkoxy groups of the present invention can be optionally substituted.

“Alkyl” represented by itself means a straight or branched, saturated orunsaturated, aliphatic radical having a chain of carbon atoms,optionally with one or more of the carbon atoms being replaced withoxygen (See “oxaalkyl”), a carbonyl group (See “oxoalkyl”), sulfur (See“thioalkyl”), and/or nitrogen (See “azaalkyl”). (C_(X))alkyl and(C_(X-Y))alkyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the number ofcarbon atoms in the chain. For example, (C₁₋₆)alkyl includes alkyls thathave a chain of between 1 and 6 carbons (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl,isopropyl, butyl, sec-butyl, isobutyl, tent-butyl, vinyl, allyl,1-propenyl, isopropenyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-butenyl, 2-methylallyl,ethynyl, 1-propynyl, 2-propynyl, and the like). Alkyl represented alongwith another radical (e.g., as in arylalkyl, heteroarylalkyl and thelike) means a straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated aliphaticdivalent radical having the number of atoms indicated or when no atomsare indicated means a bond (e.g., (C₆₋₁₀)aryl(C₁₋₃)alkyl includes,benzyl, phenethyl, 1-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 2-thienylmethyl,2-pyridinylmethyl and the like). In particular embodiments, “alkyl,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a(C₁₋₂₀)alkyl, a (C₁₋₁₅)alkyl, a (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, a (C₁₋₅)alkyl or a(C₁₋₃)alkyl. Alternatively, “alkyl,” either alone or represented alongwith another radical, can be a (C₁)alkyl, a (C₂)alkyl or a (C₃)alkyl.

“Alkylene”, unless indicated otherwise, means a straight or branched,saturated or unsaturated, aliphatic, divalent radical. (C_(X))alkyleneand (C_(X-Y))alkylene are typically used where X and Y indicate thenumber of carbon atoms in the chain. For example, (C₁₋₆)alkyleneincludes methylene (—CH₂—), ethylene (—CH₂CH₂—), trimethylene(—CH₂CH₂CH₂—), tetramethylene (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—) 2-butenylene(—CH₂CH═CHCH₂—), 2-methyltetramethylene (—CH₂CH(CH₃)CH₂CH₂—),pentamethylene (—CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂CH₂—) and the like. In particularembodiments, “alkylene,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a (C₁₋₂₀)alkylene, a (C₁₋₁₅)alkylene, a (C₁₋₁₀)alkylene,a (C₁₋₅)alkylene or a (C₁₋₃)alkylene. Alternatively, “alkylene,” eitheralone or represented along with another radical, can be a (C₁)alkylene,a (C₂)alkylene or a (C₃)alkylene.

“Alkylidene” means a straight or branched, saturated or unsaturated,aliphatic radical connected to the parent molecule by a double bond.(C_(X))alkylidene and (C_(X-Y))alkylidene are typically used where X andY indicate the number of carbon atoms in the chain. For example,(C₁₋₆)alkylidene includes methylene (═CH₂), ethylidene (═CHCH₃),isopropylidene (═C(CH₃)₂), propylidene (═CHCH₂CH₃), allylidene(═CH—CH═CH₂), and the like. In particular embodiments, “alkylidene,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a(C₁₋₂₀)alkylidene, a (C₁₋₁₅)alkylidene, a (C₁₋₁₀)alkylidene, a(C₁₋₅)alkylidene or a (C₁₋₃)alkylidene. Alternatively, “alkylidene,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a(C₁)alkylidene, a (C₂)alkylidene or a (C₃)alkylidene.

“Alkynyl” means a straight or branched, carbon chain that contains atleast one carbon-carbon triple bond (—C≡C— or —C≡CR, wherein R ishydrogen or a further substituent). Examples of alkynyl include ethynyl,propargyl, 3-methyl-1-pentynyl, 2-heptynyl and the like. In particularembodiments, “alkynyl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a (C₂₋₂₀)alkynyl, a (C₂₋₁₅)alkynyl, a (C₂₋₁₀)alkynyl, a(C₂₋₅)alkynyl or a (C₂₋₃)alkynyl. Alternatively, “alkynyl,” either aloneor represented along with another radical, can be a (C₂)alkynyl, a(C₃)alkynyl or a (C₄)alkynyl.

“Alkynylene” means a straight or branched, divalent carbon chain havingone or more carbon-carbon triple bonds (—CR≡CR′—, wherein R and R′ areeach independently hydrogen or further substituents). Examples ofalkynylene include ethyne-1,2-diyl, propyne-1,3-diyl, and the like. Inparticular embodiments, “alkynylene,” either alone or represented alongwith another radical, can be a (C₂₋₂₀) alkynylene, a (C₂₋₁₅) alkynylene,a (C₂₋₁₀) alkynylene, a (C₂₋₅) alkynylene or a (C₂₋₃) alkynylene.Alternatively, “alkynylene,” either alone or represented along withanother radical, can be a (C₂) alkynylene, a (C₃) alkynylene or a (C₄)alkynylene.

“Amido” means the radical —C(═O)—NR—, —C(═O)—NRR′, —NR—C(═O)— and/or—NR—C(═O)R′, wherein each R and R′ are independently hydrogen or afurther substituent.

“Amino” means a nitrogen moiety having two further substituents where,for example, a hydrogen or carbon atom is attached to the nitrogen. Forexample, representative amino groups include —NH₂, —NHCH₃, —N(CH₃)₂,—NH((C₁₋₁₀)alkyl), —N((C₁₋₁₀)alkyl)₂, —NH(aryl), —NH(heteroaryl),—N(aryl)₂, —N(heteroaryl)₂, and the like. Optionally, the twosubstituents together with the nitrogen may also form a ring. Unlessindicated otherwise, the compounds of the invention containing aminomoieties may include protected derivatives thereof. Suitable protectinggroups for amino moieties include acetyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl,benzyloxycarbonyl, and the like.

“Animal” includes humans, non-human mammals (e.g., dogs, cats, rabbits,cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine, deer, and the like) and non-mammals(e.g., birds, and the like).

“Aromatic” means a moiety wherein the constituent atoms make up anunsaturated ring system, all atoms in the ring system are sp² hybridizedand the total number of pi electrons is equal to 4n+2. An aromatic ringmay be such that the ring atoms are only carbon atoms or may includecarbon and non-carbon atoms (See “heteroaryl”).

“Aryl” means a monocyclic or polycyclic ring assembly wherein each ringis aromatic or when fused with one or more rings forms an aromatic ringassembly. If one or more ring atoms is not carbon (e.g., N, S), the arylis a heteroaryl. (C_(X))aryl and (C_(X-Y))aryl are typically used whereX and Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the ring. In particularembodiments, “aryl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a (C₃₋₁₄)aryl, a (C₃₋₁₀)aryl, a (C₃₋₇)aryl, a(C₈₋₁₀)aryl or a (C₅₋₇)aryl. Alternatively, “aryl,” either alone orrepresented along with another radical, can be a (C₅)aryl, a (C₆)aryl, a(C₇)aryl, a (C₈)aryl, a (C₉)aryl or a (C₁₀)aryl.

“Azaalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more ofthe carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with substitutedor unsubstituted nitrogen atoms (—NR— or —NRR′, wherein R and R′ areeach independently hydrogen or further substituents). For example, a(C₁₋₁₀)azaalkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and 10 carbonsand one or more nitrogen atoms.

“Bicycloalkyl” means a saturated or partially unsaturated fused, spiroor bridged bicyclic ring assembly. In particular embodiments,“bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₄₋₁₅)bicycloalkyl, a (C₄₋₁₀)bicycloalkyl, a(C₆₋₁₀)bicycloalkyl or a (C₈₋₁₀)bicycloalkyl. Alternatively,“bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₈)bicycloalkyl, a (C₉)bicycloalkyl or a (C₁₀)bicycloalkyl.

“Bicycloaryl” means a fused, spiro or bridged bicyclic ring assemblywherein at least one of the rings comprising the assembly is aromatic.(C_(X))bicycloaryl and (C_(X-Y))bicycloaryl are typically used where Xand Y indicate the number of carbon atoms in the bicyclic ring assemblyand directly attached to the ring. In particular embodiments,“bicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (a (C₄₋₁₅)bicycloaryl, a (C₄₋₁₀)bicycloaryl, a(C₆₋₁₀)bicycloaryl or a (C₈₋₁₀)bicycloaryl. Alternatively,“bicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₈)bicycloaryl, a (C₉)bicycloaryl or a (C₁₀)bicycloaryl.

“Bridging ring” and “bridged ring” as used herein refer to a ring thatis bonded to another ring to form a compound having a bicyclic orpolycyclic structure where two ring atoms that are common to both ringsare not directly bound to each other. Non-exclusive examples of commoncompounds having a bridging ring include borneol, norbornane,7-oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane, and the like. One or both rings of thebicyclic system may also comprise heteroatoms.

“Carbamoyl” means the radical —OC(O)NRR′, wherein R and R′ are eachindependently hydrogen or further substituents.

“Carbocycle” means a ring consisting of carbon atoms.

“Carbonyl” means the radical —C(═O)— and/or —C(═O)R, wherein R ishydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the carbonyl radicalmay be further substituted with a variety of substituents to formdifferent carbonyl groups including acids, acid halides, aldehydes,amides, esters, and ketones.

“Carboxy” means the radical —C(═O)—O— and/or —C(═O)—OR, wherein R ishydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that compounds of theinvention containing carboxy moieties may include protected derivativesthereof, i.e., where the oxygen is substituted with a protecting group.Suitable protecting groups for carboxy moieties include benzyl,tent-butyl, and the like.

“Cyano” means the radical —CN.

“Cycloalkyl” means a non-aromatic, saturated or partially unsaturated,monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic ring assembly. (C_(X))cycloalkyl and(C_(X-Y))cycloalkyl are typically used where X and Y indicate the numberof carbon atoms in the ring assembly. For example, (C₃₋₁₀)cycloalkylincludes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl,2,5-cyclohexadienyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octyl, adamantan-1-yl,decahydronaphthyl, oxocyclohexyl, dioxocyclohexyl, thiocyclohexyl,2-oxobicyclo[2.2.1]hept-1-yl, and the like. In particular embodiments,“cycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₃₋₁₄)cycloalkyl, a (C₃₋₁₀)cycloalkyl, a (C₃₋₇)cycloalkyl, a(C₈₋₁₀)cycloalkyl or a (C₅₋₇)cycloalkyl. Alternatively, “cycloalkyl,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be a(C₅)cycloalkyl, a (C₆)cycloalkyl, a (C₇)cycloalkyl, a (C₈)cycloalkyl, a(C₉)cycloalkyl or a (C₁₀)cycloalkyl.

“Cycloalkylene” means a divalent, saturated or partially unsaturated,monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic ring assembly. (C_(X))cycloalkyleneand (C_(X-Y))cycloalkylene are typically used where X and Y indicate thenumber of carbon atoms in the ring assembly. In particular embodiments,“cycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with another radical,can be a (C₃₋₁₄)cycloalkylene, a (C₃₋₁₀)cycloalkylene, a(C₃₋₇)cycloalkylene, a (C₈₋₁₀)cycloalkylene or a (C₅₋₇)cycloalkylene.Alternatively, “cycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along withanother radical, can be a (C₅)cycloalkylene, a (C₆)cycloalkylene, a(C₇)cycloalkylene, a (C₈)cycloalkylene, a (C₉)cycloalkylene or a(C₁₀)cycloalkylene.

“Disease” specifically includes any unhealthy condition of an animal orpart thereof and includes an unhealthy condition that may be caused by,or incident to, medical or veterinary therapy applied to that animal,i.e., the “side effects” of such therapy.

“Fused ring” as used herein refers to a ring that is bonded to anotherring to form a compound having a bicyclic structure where the ring atomsthat are common to both rings are directly bound to each other.Non-exclusive examples of common fused rings include decalin,naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthrene, indole, furan, benzofuran,quinoline, and the like. Compounds having fused ring systems may besaturated, partially saturated, carbocyclics, heterocyclics, aromatics,heteroaromatics, and the like.

“Halo” means fluoro, chloro, bromo or iodo.

“Heteroalkyl” means alkyl, as defined in this Application, provided thatone or more of the atoms within the alkyl chain is a heteroatom. Inparticular embodiments, “heteroalkyl,” either alone or represented alongwith another radical, can be a hetero(C₁₋₂₀)alkyl, a hetero(C₁₋₁₅)alkyl,a hetero(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, a hetero(C₁₋₅)alkyl, a hetero(C₁₋₃)alkyl or ahetero(C₁₋₂)alkyl. Alternatively, “heteroalkyl,” either alone orrepresented along with another radical, can be a hetero(C₁)alkyl, ahetero(C₂)alkyl or a hetero(C₃)alkyl.

“Heteroaryl” means a monocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic aromatic groupwherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom and the remaining ringatoms are carbon. Monocyclic heteroaryl groups include, but are notlimited to, cyclic aromatic groups having five or six ring atoms,wherein at least one ring atom is a heteroatom and the remaining ringatoms are carbon. The nitrogen atoms can be optionally quaternerized andthe sulfur atoms can be optionally oxidized. Heteroaryl groups of thisinvention include, but are not limited to, those derived from furan,imidazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, oxadiazole, oxazole,1,2,3-oxadiazole, pyrazine, pyrazole, pyridazine, pyridine, pyrimidine,pyrroline, thiazole, 1,3,4-thiadiazole, triazole and tetrazole.“Heteroaryl” also includes, but is not limited to, bicyclic or tricyclicrings, wherein the heteroaryl ring is fused to one or two ringsindependently selected from the group consisting of an aryl ring, acycloalkyl ring, a cycloalkenyl ring, and another monocyclic heteroarylor heterocycloalkyl ring. These bicyclic or tricyclic heteroarylsinclude, but are not limited to, those derived from benzo[b]furan,benzo[b]thiophene, benzimidazole, imidazo[4,5-c]pyridine, quinazoline,thieno[2,3-c]pyridine, thieno[3,2-b]pyridine, thieno[2,3-b]pyridine,indolizine, imidazo[1,2a]pyridine, quinoline, isoquinoline, phthalazine,quinoxaline, naphthyridine, quinolizine, indole, isoindole, indazole,indoline, benzoxazole, benzopyrazole, benzothiazole,imidazo[1,5-a]pyridine, pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine,imidazo[1,2-a]pyrimidine, imidazo[1,2-c]pyrimidine,imidazo[1,5-a]pyrimidine, imidazo[1,5-c]pyrimidine,pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine, pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridine, pyrrolo[3,2-c]pyridine,pyrrolo[3,2-b]pyridine, pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine,pyrrolo[3,2-d]pyrimidine, pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyrazine,pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine, pyrrolo[1,2-b]pyridazine,pyrrolo[1,2-c]pyrimidine, pyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrimidine,pyrrolo[1,2-a]pyrazine, triazo[1,5-a]pyridine, pteridine, purine,carbazole, acridine, phenazine, phenothiazene, phenoxazine,1,2-dihydropyrrolo[3,2,1-hi]indole, indolizine, pyrido[1,2-a]indole and2(1H)-pyridinone. The bicyclic or tricyclic heteroaryl rings can beattached to the parent molecule through either the heteroaryl groupitself or the aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl or heterocycloalkyl groupto which it is fused. The heteroaryl groups of this invention can besubstituted or unsubstituted. In particular embodiments, “heteroaryl,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be ahetero(C₁₋₁₃)aryl, a hetero(C₂₋₁₃)aryl, a hetero(C₂₋₆)aryl, ahetero(C₃₋₉)aryl or a hetero(C₅₋₉)aryl. Alternatively, “heteroaryl,”either alone or represented along with another radical, can be ahetero(C₃)aryl, a hetero(C₄)aryl, a hetero(C₅)aryl, a hetero(C₆)aryl, ahetero(C₇)aryl, a hetero(C₈)aryl or a hetero(C₉)aryl.

“Heteroatom” refers to an atom that is not a carbon atom. Particularexamples of heteroatoms include, but are not limited to, nitrogen,oxygen, and sulfur.

“Heteroatom moiety” includes a moiety where the atom by which the moietyis attached is not a carbon. Examples of heteroatom moieties include—NR—, —N′(O⁻)═, —O—, —S— or —S(O)₂—, wherein R is hydrogen or a furthersubstituent.

“Heterobicycloalkyl” means bicycloalkyl, as defined in this Application,provided that one or more of the atoms within the ring is a heteroatom.For example hetero(C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl as used in this applicationincludes, but is not limited to, 3-aza-bicyclo[4.1.0]hept-3-yl,2-aza-bicyclo[3.1.0]hex-2-yl, 3-aza-bicyclo[3.1.0]hex-3-yl, and thelike. In particular embodiments, “heterobicycloalkyl,” either alone orrepresented along with another radical, can be ahetero(C₁₋₁₄)bicycloalkyl, a hetero(C₄₋₁₄)bicycloalkyl, ahetero(C₄₋₉)bicycloalkyl or a hetero(C₅₋₉)bicycloalkyl. Alternatively,“heterobicycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₅)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₆)bicycloalkyl,hetero(C₇)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₈)bicycloalkyl or ahetero(C₉)bicycloalkyl.

“Heterobicycloaryl” means bicycloaryl, as defined in this Application,provided that one or more of the atoms within the ring is a heteroatom.For example, hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl as used in this Applicationincludes, but is not limited to, 2-amino-4-oxo-3,4-dihydropteridin-6-yl,tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like. In particular embodiments,“heterobicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₁₋₁₄)bicycloaryl, a hetero(C₄₋₁₄)bicycloaryl,a hetero(C₄₋₉)bicycloarylor a hetero(C₅₋₉)bicycloaryl. Alternatively,“heterobicycloaryl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₅)bicycloaryl, hetero(C₆)bicycloaryl,hetero(C₇)bicycloaryl, hetero(C₈)bicycloaryl or a hetero(C₉)bicycloaryl.

“Heterocycloalkyl” means cycloalkyl, as defined in this Application,provided that one or more of the atoms forming the ring is a heteroatomselected, independently from N, O, or S, Non-exclusive examples ofheterocycloalkyl include piperidyl, 4-morpholyl, 4-piperazinyl,pyrrolidinyl, perhydropyrrolizinyl, 1,4-diazaperhydroepinyl,1,3-dioxanyl, 1,4-dioxanyl and the like. In particular embodiments,“heterocycloalkyl,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₁₋₁₃)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C₁₋₉)cycloalkyl, ahetero(C₁₋₆)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C₅₋₉)cycloalkyl or ahetero(C₂₋₆)cycloalkyl. Alternatively, “heterocycloalkyl,” either aloneor represented along with another radical, can be ahetero(C₂)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C₃)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C₄)cycloalkyl, ahetero(C₅)cycloalkyl, a hetero(C₆)cycloalkyl, hetero(C₇)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₈)cycloalkyl or a hetero(C₉)cycloalkyl.

“Heterocycloalkylene” means cycloalkylene, as defined in thisApplication, provided that one or more of the ring member carbon atomsis replaced by a heteroatom. In particular embodiments,“heterocycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₁₋₄₃)cycloalkylene, ahetero(C₁₋₉)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C₁₋₆)cycloalkylene, ahetero(C₅₋₉)cycloalkylene or a hetero(C₂₋₆)cycloalkylene. Alternatively,“heterocycloalkylene,” either alone or represented along with anotherradical, can be a hetero(C₂)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C₃)cycloalkylene, ahetero(C₄)cycloalkylene, a hetero(C₅)cycloalkylene, ahetero(C₆)cycloalkylene, hetero(C₇)cycloalkylene,hetero(C₈)cycloalkylene or a hetero(C₉)cycloalkylene.

“Hydroxy” means the radical —OH.

“IC₅₀” means the molar concentration of an inhibitor that produces 50%inhibition of the target enzyme.

“Imino” means the radical CR(═NR′) and/or —C(═NR′)—, wherein R and R′are each independently hydrogen or a further substituent.

“Isomers” means compounds having identical molecular formulae butdiffering in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or in thearrangement of their atoms in space. Isomers that differ in thearrangement of their atoms in space are termed “stereoisomers.”Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed“diastereomers” and stereoisomers that are nonsuperimposable mirrorimages are termed “enantiomers” or sometimes “optical isomers.” A carbonatom bonded to four nonidentical substituents is termed a “chiralcenter.” A compound with one chiral center has two enantiomeric forms ofopposite chirality. A mixture of the two enantiomeric forms is termed a“racemic mixture.” A compound that has more than one chiral center has2^(n−1) enantiomeric pairs, where n is the number of chiral centers.Compounds with more than one chiral center may exist as ether anindividual diastereomer or as a mixture of diastereomers, termed a“diastereomeric mixture.” When one chiral center is present astereoisomer may be characterized by the absolute configuration of thatchiral center. Absolute configuration refers to the arrangement in spaceof the substituents attached to the chiral center. Enantiomers arecharacterized by the absolute configuration of their chiral centers anddescribed by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn, Ingold and Prelog.Conventions for stereochemical nomenclature, methods for thedetermination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers arewell known in the art (e.g., see “Advanced Organic Chemistry”, 4thedition, March, Jerry, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1992).

“Leaving group” means the group with the meaning conventionallyassociated with it in synthetic organic chemistry, i.e., an atom orgroup displaceable under reaction (e.g., alkylating) conditions.Examples of leaving groups include, but are not limited to, halo (e.g.,F, Cl, Br and I), alkyl (e.g., methyl and ethyl) and sulfonyloxy (e.g.,mesyloxy, ethanesulfonyloxy, benzenesulfonyloxy and tosyloxy),thiomethyl, thienyloxy, dihalophosphinoyloxy, tetrahalophosphoxy,benzyloxy, isopropyloxy, acyloxy, and the like.

“Moiety providing X atom separation” and “linker providing X atomseparation” between two other moieties mean that the chain of atomsdirectly linking the two other moieties is X atoms in length. When X isgiven as a range (e.g., X₁-X₂), then the chain of atoms is at least X₁and not more than X₂ atoms in length. It is understood that the chain ofatoms can be formed from a combination of atoms including, for example,carbon, nitrogen, sulfur and oxygen atoms. Further, each atom canoptionally be bound to one or more substituents, as valencies allow. Inaddition, the chain of atoms can form part of a ring. Accordingly, inone embodiment, a moiety providing X atom separation between two othermoieties (R and R′) can be represented by R-(L)_(x)-R′ where each L isindependently selected from the group consisting of CR″R′″, NR″″, O, S,CO, CS, C═NR′″″, SO, SO₂, and the like, where any two or more of R″,R′″, R″″ and R can be taken together to form a substituted orunsubstituted ring.

“Nitro” means the radical —NO₂.

“Oxaalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more ofthe carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with oxygen atoms(—O— or —OR, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). Forexample, an oxa(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and10 carbons and one or more oxygen atoms.

“Oxoalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or more ofthe carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with carbonylgroups (—C(═O)— or —C(═O)—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a furthersubstituent). The carbonyl group may be an aldehyde, ketone, ester,amide, acid or acid halide. For example, an oxo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl refers to achain comprising between 1 and 10 carbon atoms and one or more carbonylgroups.

“Oxy” means the radical —O— or —OR, wherein R is hydrogen or a furthersubstituent. Accordingly, it is noted that the oxy radical may befurther substituted with a variety of substituents to form different oxygroups including hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy or carbonyloxy.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable” means that which is useful in preparing apharmaceutical composition that is generally safe, non-toxic and neitherbiologically nor otherwise undesirable and includes that which isacceptable for veterinary use as well as human pharmaceutical use.

“Pharmaceutically acceptable salts” means salts of compounds of thepresent invention which are pharmaceutically acceptable, as definedabove, and which possess the desired pharmacological activity. Suchsalts include acid addition salts formed with inorganic acids such ashydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid,phosphoric acid, and the like; or with organic acids such as aceticacid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, heptanoic acid,cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid,malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid,tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, o-(4-hydroxybenzoyl)benzoicacid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonicacid, 1,2-ethanedisulfonic acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid,benzenesulfonic acid, p-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid,2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonicacid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]oct-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonicacid, 4,4′-methylenebis(3-hydroxy-2-ene-1-carboxylic acid),3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid,lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoicacid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid and the like.

Pharmaceutically acceptable salts also include base addition salts whichmay be formed when acidic protons present are capable of reacting withinorganic or organic bases. Acceptable inorganic bases include sodiumhydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium hydroxide, aluminum hydroxide andcalcium hydroxide. Acceptable organic bases include ethanolamine,diethanolamine, triethanolamine, tromethamine, N-methylglucamine and thelike.

“Polycyclic ring” includes bicyclic and multi-cyclic rings. Theindividual rings comprising the polycyclic ring can be fused, spiro orbridging rings.

“Prodrug” means a compound that is convertible in vivo metabolicallyinto an inhibitor according to the present invention. The prodrug itselfmay or may not also have activity with respect to a given targetprotein. For example, a compound comprising a hydroxy group may beadministered as an ester that is converted by hydrolysis in vivo to thehydroxy compound. Suitable esters that may be converted in vivo intohydroxy compounds include acetates, citrates, lactates, phosphates,tartrates, malonates, oxalates, salicylates, propionates, succinates,fumarates, maleates, methylene-bis-b-hydroxynaphthoates, gentisates,isethionates, di-p-toluoyltartrates, methanesulfonates,ethanesulfonates, benzenesulfonates, p-toluenesulfonates,cyclohexylsulfamates, quinates, esters of amino acids, and the like.Similarly, a compound comprising an amine group may be administered asan amide that is converted by hydrolysis in vivo to the amine compound.

“Protected derivatives” means derivatives of inhibitors in which areactive site or sites are blocked with protecting groups. Protectedderivatives are useful in the preparation of inhibitors or in themselvesmay be active as inhibitors. A comprehensive list of suitable protectinggroups can be found in T. W. Greene, Protecting Groups in OrganicSynthesis, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1999.

“Ring” and “ring assembly” means a carbocyclic or a heterocyclic systemand includes aromatic and non-aromatic systems. The system can bemonocyclic, bicyclic or polycyclic. In addition, for bicyclic andpolycyclic systems, the individual rings comprising the polycyclic ringcan be fused, spiro or bridging rings.

“Subject” and “patient” includes humans, non-human mammals (e.g., dogs,cats, rabbits, cattle, horses, sheep, goats, swine, deer, and the like)and non-mammals (e.g., birds, and the like).

“Substituent convertible to hydrogen in vivo” means any group that isconvertible to a hydrogen atom by enzymological or chemical meansincluding, but not limited to, hydrolysis and hydrogenolysis. Examplesinclude hydrolyzable groups, such as acyl groups, groups having anoxycarbonyl group, amino acid residues, peptide residues,o-nitrophenylsulfenyl, trimethylsilyl, tetrahydro-pyranyl,diphenylphosphinyl, and the like. Examples of acyl groups includeformyl, acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, and the like. Examples of groups havingan oxycarbonyl group include ethoxycarbonyl, t-butoxycarbonyl[(CH₃)₃C—OCO—], benzyloxycarbonyl, p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl,vinyloxycarbonyl, β-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethoxycarbonyl, and the like.Examples of suitable amino acid residues include amino acid residues perse and amino acid residues that are protected with a protecting group.Suitable amino acid residues include, but are not limited to, residuesof Gly (glycine), Ala (alanine; CH₃CH(NH₂)CO—), Arg (arginine), Asn(asparagine), Asp (aspartic acid), Cys (cysteine), Glu (glutamic acid),His (histidine), Ile (isoleucine), Leu (leucine; (CH₃)₂CHCH₂CH(NH₂)CO—),Lys (lysine), Met (methionine), Phe (phenylalanine), Pro (proline), Ser(serine), Thr (threonine), Trp (tryptophan), Tyr (tyrosine), Val(valine), Nva (norvaline), Hse (homoserine), 4-Hyp (4-hydroxyproline),5-Hyl (5-hydroxylysine), Orn (ornithine) and 13-Ala. Examples ofsuitable protecting groups include those typically employed in peptidesynthesis, including acyl groups (such as formyl and acetyl),arylmethyloxycarbonyl groups (such as benzyloxycarbonyl andp-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl), t-butoxycarbonyl groups [(CH₃)₃C—OCO—], andthe like. Suitable peptide residues include peptide residues comprisingtwo to five, and optionally two to three, of the aforesaid amino acidresidues. Examples of such peptide residues include, but are not limitedto, residues of such peptides as Ala-Ala [CH₃CH(NH₂)CO—NHCH(CH₃)CO—],Gly-Phe, Nva-Nva, Ala-Phe, Gly-Gly, Gly-Gly-Gly, Ala-Met, Met-Met,Leu-Met and Ala-Leu. The residues of these amino acids or peptides canbe present in stereochemical configurations of the D-form, the L-form ormixtures thereof. In addition, the amino acid or peptide residue mayhave an asymmetric carbon atom. Examples of suitable amino acid residueshaving an asymmetric carbon atom include residues of Ala, Leu, Phe, Trp,Nva, Val, Met, Ser, Lys, Thr and Tyr. Peptide residues having anasymmetric carbon atom include peptide residues having one or moreconstituent amino acid residues having an asymmetric carbon atom.Examples of suitable amino acid protecting groups include thosetypically employed in peptide synthesis, including acyl groups (such asformyl and acetyl), arylmethyloxycarbonyl groups (such asbenzyloxycarbonyl and p-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl), t-butoxycarbonyl groups[(CH₃)₃C—OCO—], and the like. Other examples of substituents“convertible to hydrogen in vivo” include reductively eliminablehydrogenolyzable groups. Examples of suitable reductively eliminablehydrogenolyzable groups include, but are not limited to, arylsulfonylgroups (such as o-toluenesulfonyl); methyl groups substituted withphenyl or benzyloxy (such as benzyl, trityl and benzyloxymethyl);arylmethoxycarbonyl groups (such as benzyloxycarbonyl ando-methoxy-benzyloxycarbonyl); and halogenoethoxycarbonyl groups (such asβ,β,β-trichloroethoxycarbonyl and β-iodoethoxycarbonyl).

“Substituted or unsubstituted” means that a given moiety may consist ofonly hydrogen substituents through available valencies (unsubstituted)or may further comprise one or more non-hydrogen substituents throughavailable valencies (substituted) that are not otherwise specified bythe name of the given moiety. For example, isopropyl is an example of anethylene moiety that is substituted by —CH₃. In general, a non-hydrogensubstituent may be any substituent that may be bound to an atom of thegiven moiety that is specified to be substituted. Examples ofsubstituents include, but are not limited to, aldehyde, alicyclic,aliphatic, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, alkylene, alkylidene, amide, amino, aminoalkyl,aromatic, aryl, bicycloalkyl, bicycloaryl, carbamoyl, carbocyclyl,carboxyl, carbonyl group, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylene, ester, halo,heterobicycloalkyl, heterocycloalkylene, heteroaryl, heterobicycloaryl,heterocycloalkyl, oxo, hydroxy, iminoketone, ketone, nitro, oxaalkyl,and oxoalkyl moieties, each of which may optionally also be substitutedor unsubstituted. In one particular embodiment, examples of substituentsinclude, but are not limited to, hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio,oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, (C₁₋₁₀)alkoxy, (C₄₋₁₂)aryloxy,hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino,(C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,(C₁₋₁₀)azaalkyl, imino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,(C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl andhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl. In addition, the substituent is itselfoptionally substituted by a further substituent. In one particularembodiment, examples of the further substituent include, but are notlimited to, hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,carbonyloxy, (C₁₋₁₀)alkoxy, (C₄₋₁₂)aryloxy, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryloxy,carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,sulfonyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, (C₁₋₁₀)azaalkyl,imino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,(C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl andhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl.

“Sulfinyl” means the radical —SO— and/or —SO—R, wherein R is hydrogen ora further substituent. It is noted that the sulfinyl radical may befurther substituted with a variety of substituents to form differentsulfinyl groups including sulfinic acids, sulfinamides, sulfinyl esters,and sulfoxides.

“Sulfonyl” means the radical —SO₂— and/or —SO₂—R, wherein R is hydrogenor a further substituent. It is noted that the sulfonyl radical may befurther substituted with a variety of substituents to form differentsulfonyl groups including sulfonic acids, sulfonamides, sulfonateesters, and sulfones.

“Therapeutically effective amount” means that amount which, whenadministered to an animal for treating a disease, is sufficient toeffect such treatment for the disease.

“Thio” denotes replacement of an oxygen by a sulfur and includes, but isnot limited to, —SR, —S— and ═S containing groups.

“Thioalkyl” means an alkyl, as defined above, except where one or moreof the carbon atoms forming the alkyl chain are replaced with sulfuratoms (—S— or —S—R, wherein R is hydrogen or a further substituent). Forexample, a thio(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl refers to a chain comprising between 1 and10 carbons and one or more sulfur atoms.

“Thiocarbonyl” means the radical —C(═S)— and/or —C(═S)—R, wherein R ishydrogen or a further substituent. It is noted that the thiocarbonylradical may be further substituted with a variety of substituents toform different thiocarbonyl groups including thioacids, thioamides,thioesters, and thioketones.

“Treatment” or “treating” means any administration of a compound of thepresent invention and includes:

(1) preventing the disease from occurring in an animal which may bepredisposed to the disease but does not yet experience or display thepathology or symptomatology of the disease,

(2) inhibiting the disease in an animal that is experiencing ordisplaying the pathology or symptomatology of the diseased (i.e.,arresting further development of the pathology and/or symptomatology),or

(3) ameliorating the disease in an animal that is experiencing ordisplaying the pathology or symptomatology of the diseased (i.e.,reversing the pathology and/or symptomatology).

It is noted in regard to all of the definitions provided herein that thedefinitions should be interpreted as being open ended in the sense thatfurther substituents beyond those specified may be included. Hence, a C₁alkyl indicates that there is one carbon atom but does not indicate whatare the substituents on the carbon atom. Hence, a (C₁)alkyl comprisesmethyl (i.e., —CH₃) as well as —CRR′R″ where R, R′, and R″ may eachindependently be hydrogen or a further substituent where the atomattached to the carbon is a heteroatom or cyano. Hence, CF₃, CH₂OH andCH₂CN, for example, are all (C₁)alkyls. Similarly, terms such asalkylamino and the like comprise dialkylamino and the like.

A compound having a formula that is represented with a dashed bond isintended to include the formulae optionally having zero, one or moredouble bonds, as exemplified and shown below:

In addition, atoms making up the compounds of the present invention areintended to include all isotopic forms of such atoms. Isotopes, as usedherein, include those atoms having the same atomic number but differentmass numbers. By way of general example and without limitation, isotopesof hydrogen include tritium and deuterium, and isotopes of carboninclude ¹³C and ¹⁴C.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to compounds, compositions, kits andarticles of manufacture that may be used to inhibit Mitogen-ActivatedProtein Kinases (referred to herein as MEK) and, in particular, MAPK/ERKKinase 1 (referred to herein as MEK1) and/or MAPK/ERK Kinase 2 (referredto herein as MEK2).

MEK belongs to the protein kinase family of enzymes. Themitogen-activated protein kinase (MAPK) pathways are evolutionarilyconserved from yeast to man and respond to a variety of extracellularsignals to induce cell differentiation and proliferation. Theextracellular-regulated kinase (ERK) cascade is one of three major MAPKsignaling pathways and is the predominant cascade that controls cellproliferation, migration, division, and differentiation (Schaeffer, H.J., and Weber, M. J. (1999) Mol. Cell. Biol. 19, 2435-2444). In thispathway, binding of GTP to the Ras protein initiates a three proteinkinase cascade, which leads to ERK activation through the interveningprotein kinases Raf-1 and MEK1/2. The MEK1/2 kinases aredual-specificity threonine/tyrosine kinases that activate the downstreamERK kinase by phosphorylating specific ERK threonine and tyrosineresidues, and are themselves activated by phosphorylation of MEK serineresidues by the upstream RAF kinase. MEK1 and MEK2 share a high degreeof amino acid sequence similarity, particularly in their kinase domains,and both are capable of phosphorylating ERK (Zheng, C-F., and Guan, K.(1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268, 11435-11439).

Multiple studies have linked the RAF/MEK/ERK signaling pathway to thegrowth and survival of many diverse human tumors including, but notlimited to cancers of the colon, pancreas ovaries, and non-small-celllung cancers (reviewed in: Sebolt-Leopold, J. S. and Herrera R. (2004)Nature Reviews: Cancer, 4, 937-947). For these reasons there has beenconsiderable interest in developing small molecule pharmaceuticalinhibitors of this pathway.

It is noted that the compounds of the present invention may also possessinhibitory activity for other protein kinase family members and thus maybe used to address disease states associated with these other familymembers.

Crystal Structure of MEK2

Takeda San Diego, Inc. solved the crystal structure of MEK2. Knowledgeof the crystal structure was used to guide the design of the inhibitorsprovided herein.

The overall architecture of the MEK proteins resembles the conserved,two domain protein kinase fold, consisting of a large C-terminalcomprised mostly of an α-helical domain and a smaller N-terminal lobecomprised primarily of a β-sheet. The N-lobe typically contains a singleα-helix termed the Control or C-helix which influences the productivebinding of nucleotides at the active region, which is located at thecleft between the two domains. Additionally, productive binding ofnucleotide and substrates can be dependent upon an Activation Loop, orA-Loop, which is in an extended conformation when active, but often in afolded-back inactive conformation that at least partially occludes theactive region. Phosphorylation of specific residues within the A-Loopcan help stabilise the active, extended conformation. Common kinaseinhibitory mechanisms typically target structural alterations within theC-Helix or A Loop.

MEM and/or MEK2 Inhibitors

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₃ is selected from the group consisting of amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl,        (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one particular variation of the above embodiment, when R₆ is absent,Q is CO, R₁ is unsubstituted phenyl, and R₂ is hydrogen, then R₃ is not—CH₂CN. In another variation of the above embodiment, when R₆ is absentQ is CO, R₁ is a tetrahydro-2H-pyran-3,4,5-triyl triacetate, and R₂ ishydrogen, then R₃ is not —CH₂Cl. In still another variation of the aboveembodiment, when R₆ is absent, Q is CO, R₁ is2,2,6,6-tetramethylpiperidin-1-ol, and R₂ is hydrogen, then R₃ is not—CH═CH-Ph. In yet another variation of the above embodiment, when R₆ isabsent, Q is CO, R₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, R₂ ishydrogen, and R₄ and R₅ are each independently hydrogen or methyl, thenR₃ is not —NH—R₁₀ where R₁₀ is pyridin-2-yl or a substituted orunsubstituted phenyl.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;        and    -   R₁₀ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy,        hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₉ and R₁₀ are taken together        to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one variation of the above embodiment, when R₆ is absent, Q is CO, R₁is a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, R₂ is hydrogen, R₄ and R₅ areeach independently hydrogen or methyl, and R₉ is hydrogen, then R₁₀ isnot pyridin-2-yl or a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;        and    -   R₁₁ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   L is absent or a linker providing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 atom        separation between the atoms to which L is attached, wherein the        atoms of the linker providing the separation are selected from        the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur;        and    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;        and    -   R₁₂ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo,        nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy,        heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   L is absent or a linker providing 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 atom        separation between the atoms to which L is attached, wherein the        atoms of the linker providing the separation are selected from        the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur;    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;        and    -   R₁₃ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   n is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6;        and    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₁₃ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted; and    -   each R₁₄ and R₁₅ is independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,        carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together        with the atom to which they are attached to form C═O or C═S, or        any two R₁₃, R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together to form a        substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   n is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6;        and    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₁₃ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted; and    -   each R₁₄ and R₁₅ is independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,        carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together        with the atom to which they are attached to form C═O or C═S, or        any two R₁₃, R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together to form a        substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   m is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;        and    -   each R₁₆ is independently selected from the group consisting of        hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy,        alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl,        aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or two R₁₆ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   R_(16a) and R_(16c) are each independently selected from the        group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy,        hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   m is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₁₀ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy,        hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₉ and R₁₀ are taken together        to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring; and    -   each R₁₆ is independently selected from the group consisting of        hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy,        alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl,        aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or two R₁₆ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   n is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6;    -   m is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₁₃ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   each R₁₄ and R₁₅ is independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,        carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together        with the atom to which they are attached to form C═O or C═S, or        any two R₁₃, R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together to form a        substituted or unsubstituted ring; and    -   each R₁₆ is independently selected from the group consisting of        hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy,        alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl,        aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or two R₁₆ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   n is selected from the group consisting of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6;    -   m is selected from the group consisting of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5;    -   R₁₃ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   each R₁₄ and R₁₅ is independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,        carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together        with the atom to which they are attached to form C═O or C═S, or        any two R₁₃, R₁₄ and R₁₅ are taken together to form a        substituted or unsubstituted ring;    -   each R₁₆ is independently selected from the group consisting of        hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy,        alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl,        aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or two R₁₆ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring; and    -   R_(16a) and R_(16c) are each independently selected from the        group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy,        hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   R₁₇ and R₁₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy,        carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, MEK1 and/or MEK2 inhibitors of the present inventioncomprise:

-   -   wherein    -   R₁₇ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo,        nitro, cyano, thio, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy,        heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a processcomprising:

reacting a compound having the formula

-   -   with a compound having the formula NHR₁R₂ under conditions that        form a first reaction product having the formula

reacting the first reaction product with a compound having the formulaX₂COOPh under conditions that form a second reaction product having theformula

reacting the second reaction product with a compound having the formulaNHR₉R₁₀ under conditions that form a product having the formula

-   -   wherein    -   X₁ and X₂ are each independently a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₄₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond;    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond;    -   R₉ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;        and    -   R₁₀ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, oxy,        hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₉ and R₁₀ are taken together        to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a processcomprising:

reacting a compound having the formula

-   -   with a compound having the formula NHR₁R₂ under conditions that        form a first reaction product having the formula

reacting the first reaction product with a compound having the formulaX₃COR₃ under conditions that form a product having the formula

-   -   wherein    -   X₁ and X₃ are each independently a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₃ is selected from the group consisting of amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl,        (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one variation of each of the above processes, the process furthercomprises:

reacting a compound having the formula

-   -   with a compound having the formula PO(X₁)₃ under conditions that        form a reaction product having the formula

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a processcomprising:

reacting a compound having the formula

-   -   with an acid under conditions that form a reaction product        having the formula

reacting the reaction product with a compound having the formula NHR₁R₂under conditions that form a product having the formula

-   -   wherein    -   X₄ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a processcomprising:

reacting a compound having the formula

-   -   with a compound having the formula NHR₁R₂ under conditions that        form a reaction product having the formula

reacting the reaction product with an acid under conditions that form aproduct having the formula

-   -   wherein    -   X₅ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₃ is selected from the group consisting of amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl,        (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   X₁ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   X₄ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero        (C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   X₅ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond;    -   R₆ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        heteroaryloxy, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino,        sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₆ is absent when        the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   X₅ is a leaving group;    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₃ is selected from the group consisting of amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl,        (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cyclo alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to a compound havingthe formula:

-   -   wherein    -   Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS;    -   R₁ is selected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₂ is hydrogen or a substituent convertible in vivo to hydrogen;    -   R₃ is selected from the group consisting of amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,        sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl,        (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted;    -   R₄ and R₅ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy,        aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, amino,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl,        (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₁₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, provided that R₄ and R₅ are each        independently absent when the atoms to which they are bound form        part of a double bond; and    -   R₇ and R₈ are each independently selected from the group        consisting of hydrogen, cyano, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,        oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,        sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,        heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,        hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,        hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl,        (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl and hetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each        substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ and R₅ are taken together to        form a substituted or unsubstituted ring, provided that R₈ is        absent when the atom to which it is bound forms part of a double        bond.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, Q isCO. In another variation of each of the above embodiments andvariations, Q is —CR₇═.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, L is asubstituted or unsubstituted (C₁₋₁₀)alkylene. In another variation ofeach of the above embodiments and variations, L is a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₃)alkylene.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁ isselected from the group consisting of (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, eachsubstituted or unsubstituted. In another variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₁ is selected from the group consisting of(C₄₋₁₂)aryl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each substituted or unsubstituted. Instill another variation of each of the above embodiments and variations,R₁ is a substituted or unsubstituted (C₄₋₁₂)aryl. In yet anothervariation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁ is asubstituted or unsubstituted phenyl. In a further variation of each ofthe above embodiments and variations, R₁ is a substituted orunsubstituted (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl. In still a further variation of eachof the above embodiments and variations, R₁ is a substituted orunsubstituted naphthyl. In yet a further variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₁ is a substituted or unsubstitutedhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl,

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁ issubstituted with one or more substituents selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, thio, alkoxy, (C₁₋₃)alkyl,hydroxy(C₁₋₃)alkyl and (C₃₋₈)cycloalkyl, each substituted orunsubstituted. In another variation of each of the above embodiments andvariations, R₁ is substituted with one or more substituents selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo, iodo,cyano, methylthio, methoxy, trifluoromethoxy, methyl, ethyl,trifluoromethyl, ethynyl, n-propanolyl and cyclopropyl.

In still another variation of each of the above embodiments andvariations, R₁ comprises:

-   -   wherein    -   R_(16a), R_(16b), R_(16c), R_(16d) and R_(16e) are each        independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,        halo, cyano, thio, alkoxy, (C₁₋₃)alkyl and hydroxy(C₁₋₃)alkyl,        each substituted or unsubstituted.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₂ ishydrogen.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₄ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl. In another variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₄ is a substituted or unsubstituted(C₁₋₃)alkyl. In still another variation of each of the above embodimentsand variations, R₄ is methyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₅ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen, (C₁₋₅)alkyl,amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl and (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, eachsubstituted or unsubstituted. In another variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₅ is selected from the group consisting of(C₁₋₅)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₅)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hydroxy(C₁₋₅)alkylalkoxy(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyland (C₃₋₈)cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted. In stillanother variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₅ isselected from the group consisting of (C₁₋₃)alkyl,(C₁₋₃)alkylamino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, di(C₁₋₃)alkylamino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,terahydrofuranyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, pyrrolidinolyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,thiazolidinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, hydroxyl-(C₁₋₃)alkan-one-yl,(C₁₋₃)alkoxy-(C₁₋₃)alkan-one-yl, (C₁₋₅)alkenyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₃)alkyl,N—(C₁₋₃)alkoxy-acetamido(C₁₋₃)alkyl,tetrahydro-2H-1,2-oxazine-one-yl-(C₁₋₃)alkyl,N—((C₁₋₃)alkylsulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkoxy)-amino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,N—((C₁₋₃)alkylsulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl)-amino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,(C₁₋₃)alkylsulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkoxy(C₁₋₃)alkyl,imidazolidin-one-yl-(C₁₋₃)alkyl, dihydroxy-(C₁₋₅)alkyl andisoxazolidin-one-yl-(C₁₋₃)alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted. Inyet another variation of each of the above embodiments and variations,R₅ is selected from the group consisting of ethyl, propyl, n-butyl,cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, methylaminomethyl,dimethylaminomethyl, terahydrofuranylmethyl, terahydrofuranylethyl,pyrrolidinolylmethyl, thiazolidinylmethyl, thiazolidinylethyl,hydroxyl-propan-one-yl, methoxy-propan-one-yl, butenyl, hydroxybutanyl,N-methoxy-acetamidomethyl, tetrahydro-2H-1,2-oxazine-one-yl-methyl,N-(methylsulfinylethoxy)-aminomethyl,N-(methylsulfinylpropyl)-aminomethyl, methylsulfonylethoxymethyl,imidazolidin-one-yl-ethyl, dihydroxy-butanyl andisoxazolidin-one-yl-methyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₅ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl. In another variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₅ is a substituted or unsubstituted(C₁₋₃)alkyl. In still another variation of each of the above embodimentsand variations, R₅ is methyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₆ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl. In another variation of each of the aboveembodiments and variations, R₆ is hydrogen.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₇ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₈ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₉ ishydrogen.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₀ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxyl, alkoxy,(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl and hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, each substituted orunsubstituted. In another variation of each of the above embodiments andvariations, R₁₀ is not taken together with R₉ to form a ring.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₁ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkoxy, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,hydroxy(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl and hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, eachsubstituted or unsubstituted.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₂ isselected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl andhetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₃ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a substituted orunsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, n isselected from the group consisting of 1, 2 and 3. In another variationof each of the above embodiments and variations, n is 2.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, eachR₁₄ is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,hydroxyl, (C₁₋₅)alkyl and hydroxy(C₁₋₅)alkyl, each substituted orunsubstituted.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, eachR₁₅ is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,hydroxyl, (C₁₋₅)alkyl and hydroxy(C₁₋₅)alkyl, each substituted orunsubstituted.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₆ isselected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, carbonyl,(C₁₋₅)alkyl and (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted. Inanother variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R₁₆is a halo.

In another variation of each of the above embodiments and variations,R_(16a) is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, and asubstituted or unsubstituted (C₁₋₅)alkyl. In still another variation ofeach of the above embodiments and variations, R_(16a) is a halo.

In still another variation of each of the above embodiments andvariations, R_(16b) is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,halo, carbonyl, alkoxy, (C₁₋₃)alkyl and (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, eachsubstituted or unsubstituted. In yet another variation of each of theabove embodiments and variations, R_(16c) is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen, halo, cyano, thio, (C₁₋₃)alkyl andhydroxy(C₁₋₃)alkyl, each substituted or unsubstituted. In a furthervariation of each of the above embodiments and variations, R_(16c) is ahalo.

In one variation of each of the above embodiments and variations, eachof X₁, X₂, X₃, X₄ and/or X₅ is independently halo.

Particular examples of compounds according to the present inventioninclude, but are not limited to:

-   (R)—N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   N-(cyclopropylmethoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-methoxy-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-hydroxy-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   Methyl    2-(6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamido)acetate;-   2-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamido)acetic    acid;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carbohydrazide;-   5-Acetyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(furan-2-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-methoxyacetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-(2-methoxyethoxy)acetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   2-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl)-2-oxoethyl    acetate;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-hydroxyacetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-Iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-Bromo-2-chlorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-Bromo-2-fluorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   Ethyl    6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   Ethyl    6-(2-fluorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   Ethyl    6-(4-bromo-2-chlorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   Phenyl    6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   N-(1,3-dihydroxypropan-2-yloxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(3-hydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-5-(5-methylisoxazole-3-carbonyl)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   2-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl)-2-oxoacetic    acid;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(4-hydroxyisoxazolidine-2-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-N-(2-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (S)—N-(3,4-Dihydroxybutoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   N-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-6-(4-iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)-6-(2,3-Difluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (S)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(4-iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (S)-6-(2-Chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)-6-(2,5-Difluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(3-Ethyl-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   N-(2-Aminoethyl)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-5-(piperazine-1-carbonyl)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N′,N′,1,3-tetramethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carbohydrazide;-   Phenyl    3-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-3-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   3-Ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   Phenyl    1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   1-Ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   Phenyl    6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate;-   (R)—N-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidine-5-carboxylic    acid ((R)-2,4-dihydroxy-butoxy)-amide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidine-5-carboxylic    acid ((S)-2,4-dihydroxy-butoxy)-amide;-   6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-5-(3-hydroxy-azetidine-1-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1H-pyrimidine-2,4-dione;-   6-(4-bromo-2-chlorophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-bromo-2-fluorophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-bromo-2-methylphenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-ethynyl-2-fluorophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(4-cyclopropyl-2-fluorophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-(methylcarbamoyl)phenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   3-cyclopropyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-3-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   3-(2-(dimethylamino)ethyl)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-N-((1-methylpiperidin-4-yl)methoxy)-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   5-(2-(2-(dimethylamino)ethoxy)acetyl)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione;-   N-cyclopropyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(3-hydroxycyclobutyl)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;    and-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-N-(oxetan-3-yl)-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide.

In another embodiment, particular examples of compounds according to thepresent invention include, but are not limited to:

-   (R)—N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   (R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;-   N-(1,3-dihydroxypropan-2-yloxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide;    and-   N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-6-(4-iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide.

It is noted that the compounds of the present invention may be in theform of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, biohydrolyzable ester,biohydrolyzable amide, biohydrolyzable carbamate, solvate, hydrate orprodrug thereof. For example, the compound optionally comprises asubstituent that is convertible in vivo to a different substituent suchas a hydrogen.

It is further noted that the compound may be present in a mixture ofstereoisomers, or the compound may comprise a single stereoisomer.

The present invention also provides a pharmaceutical compositioncomprising as an active ingredient a compound according to any one ofthe above embodiments and variations. In one particular variation, thecomposition is a solid formulation adapted for oral administration. Inanother particular variation, the composition is a liquid formulationadapted for oral administration. In yet another particular variation,the composition is a tablet. In still another particular variation, thecomposition is a liquid formulation adapted for parenteraladministration.

In another of its aspects, there is provided a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising a compound according to any one of the aboveembodiments and variations, wherein the composition is adapted foradministration by a route selected from the group consisting of orally,parenterally, intraperitoneally, intravenously, intraarterially,transdermally, sublingually, intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally,intranasally, liposomally, via inhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly,via local delivery (for example by catheter or stent), subcutaneously,intraadiposally, intraarticularly, and intrathecally.

In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a kit comprising acompound of any one of the above embodiments and variations; andinstructions which comprise one or more forms of information selectedfrom the group consisting of indicating a disease state for which thecomposition is to be administered, storage information for thecomposition, dosing information and instructions regarding how toadminister the composition. In one particular variation, the kitcomprises the compound in a multiple dose form.

In still another of its aspects, there is provided an article ofmanufacture comprising a compound of any one of the above embodimentsand variations; and packaging materials. In one variation, the packagingmaterial comprises a container for housing the compound. In oneparticular variation, the container comprises a label indicating one ormore members of the group consisting of a disease state for which thecompound is to be administered, storage information, dosing informationand/or instructions regarding how to administer the compound. In anothervariation, the article of manufacture comprises the compound in amultiple dose form.

In a further of its aspects, there is provided a therapeutic methodcomprising administering a compound of any one of the above embodimentsand variations to a subject.

In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibiting aMitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK) comprising contacting the MEKwith a compound of any one of the above embodiments and variations.

In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibitinga Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK) comprising causing a compoundof any one of the above embodiments and variations to be present in asubject in order to inhibit the MEK in vivo.

In a further of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibitingMitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK) comprising administering a firstcompound to a subject that is converted in vivo to a second compoundwherein the second compound inhibits the MEK in vivo, the secondcompound being a compound according to any one of the above embodimentsand variations.

In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating adisease state for which a Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK)possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomologyof the disease state, the method comprising causing a compound of anyone of the above embodiments and variations to be present in a subjectin a therapeutically effective amount for the disease state.

In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating adisease state for which a Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK)possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomologyof the disease state, the method comprising administering a compound ofany one of the above embodiments and variations to a subject, whereinthe compound is present in the subject in a therapeutically effectiveamount for the disease state.

In a further of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating adisease state for which a Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK)possesses activity that contributes to the pathology and/or symptomologyof the disease state, the method comprising administering a firstcompound to a subject that is converted in vivo to a second compoundwherein the second compound inhibits the MEK in vivo. It is noted thatthe compounds of the present invention may be the first or secondcompounds.

In one variation of each of the above methods the disease state isselected from the group consisting of cancerous hyperproliferativedisorders (e.g., brain, lung, squamous cell, bladder, gastric,pancreatic, breast, head, neck, renal, kidney, ovarian, prostate,colorectal, epidermoid, esophageal, testicular, gynecological or thyroidcancer); non-cancerous hyperproliferative disorders (e.g., benignhyperplasia of the skin (e.g., psoriasis), restenosis, and benignprostatic hypertrophy (BPH)); pancreatitis; kidney disease; pain;preventing blastocyte implantation; treating diseases related tovasculogenesis or angiogenesis (e.g., tumor angiogenesis, acute andchronic inflammatory disease such as rheumatoid arthritis,atherosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, skin diseases such aspsoriasis, excema, and scleroderma, diabetes, diabetic retinopathy,retinopathy of prematurity, age-related macular degeneration,hemangioma, glioma, melanoma, Kaposi's sarcoma and ovarian, breast,lung, pancreatic, prostate, colon and epidermoid cancer); asthma;neutrophil chemotaxis (e.g., reperfusion injury in myocardial infarctionand stroke and inflammatory arthritis); septic shock; T-cell mediateddiseases where immune suppression would be of value (e.g., theprevention of organ transplant rejection, graft versus host disease,lupus erythematosus, multiple sclerosis, and rheumatoid arthritis);atherosclerosis; inhibition of keratinocyte responses to growth factorcocktails; and other diseases.

In another variation of each of the above methods, the Mitogen-ActivatedProtein Kinase (MEK) is MEK1. In still another variation of each of theabove methods, the Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK) is MEK2.

In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibiting anExtracellular Regulated Kinase (ERK) comprising contacting the ERK witha compound of any of the above embodiments and variations.

In still another of its aspects, there is provided a method ofinhibiting Extracellular Regulated Kinase (ERK) comprising causing acompound of any of the above embodiments and variations to be present ina subject in order to inhibit the ERK in vivo.

In yet another of its aspects, there is provided a method of inhibitingExtracellular Regulated Kinase (ERK) comprising administering a firstcompound to a subject that is converted in vivo to a second compoundwherein the second compound inhibits the ERK in vivo, the secondcompound being a compound according to any of the above embodiments andvariations.

In one variation of the above methods, the Extracellular RegulatedKinase (ERK) is ERK1. In another variation of the above methods, theExtracellular Regulated Kinase (ERK) is ERK2.

In another of its aspects, there is provided a method of treating adisease state for which a mutation in the B-Raf gene contributes to thepathology and/or symptomology of the disease state including, forexample, melanomas, lung cancer, colon cancer and other tumor types.

In still another of its aspects, the present invention relates to theuse of a compound of any of the above embodiments and variations as amedicament.

In yet another of its aspects, the present invention relates to the useof a compound according to any one of the above embodiments andvariations in the manufacture of a medicament for inhibiting aMitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK).

In a further of its aspects, the present invention relates to the use ofa compound according to any one of the above embodiments and variationsin the manufacture of a medicament for treating a disease state forwhich a Mitogen-Activated Protein Kinase (MEK) possesses activity thatcontributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the disease state.

In still a further of its aspects, the present invention relates to theuse of a compound according to any one of the above embodiments andvariations in the manufacture of a medicament for treatinghyperproliferative disorders; pancreatitis; kidney disease; pain;diseases involving blastocyte implantation; diseases related tovasculogenesis or angiogenesis; asthma; neutrophil chemotaxis; andseptic shock.

Salts, Hydrates, and Prodrugs of MEK Inhibitors

It should be recognized that the compounds of the present invention maybe present and optionally administered in the form of salts, hydratesand prodrugs that are converted in vivo into the compounds of thepresent invention. For example, it is within the scope of the presentinvention to convert the compounds of the present invention into and usethem in the form of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts derived fromvarious organic and inorganic acids and bases in accordance withprocedures well known in the art.

When the compounds of the present invention possess a free base form,the compounds can be prepared as a pharmaceutically acceptable acidaddition salt by reacting the free base form of the compound with apharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic acid, e.g.,hydrohalides such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide; othermineral acids and their corresponding salts such as sulfate, nitrate,phosphate, etc.; and alkyl and monoarylsulfonates such asethanesulfonate, toluenesulfonate and benzenesulfonate; and otherorganic acids and their corresponding salts such as acetate, tartrate,maleate, succinate, citrate, benzoate, salicylate and ascorbate. Furtheracid addition salts of the present invention include, but are notlimited to: adipate, alginate, arginate, aspartate, bisulfate,bisulfite, bromide, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, caprylate,chloride, chlorobenzoate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate,dihydrogenphosphate, dinitrobenzoate, dodecylsulfate, fumarate,galacterate (from mucic acid), galacturonate, glucoheptaoate, gluconate,glutamate, glycerophosphate, hemisuccinate, hemisulfate, heptanoate,hexanoate, hippurate, hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide,2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, iodide, isethionate, iso-butyrate, lactate,lactobionate, malate, malonate, mandelate, metaphosphate,methanesulfonate, methylbenzoate, monohydrogenphosphate,2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oxalate, oleate, pamoate,pectinate, persulfate, phenylacetate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate,phosphonate and phthalate. It should be recognized that the free baseforms will typically differ from their respective salt forms somewhat inphysical properties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwisethe salts are equivalent to their respective free base forms for thepurposes of the present invention.

When the compounds of the present invention possess a free acid form, apharmaceutically acceptable base addition salt can be prepared byreacting the free acid form of the compound with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable inorganic or organic base. Examples of such bases are alkalimetal hydroxides including potassium, sodium and lithium hydroxides;alkaline earth metal hydroxides such as barium and calcium hydroxides;alkali metal alkoxides, e.g., potassium ethanolate and sodiumpropanolate; and various organic bases such as ammonium hydroxide,piperidine, diethanolamine and N-methylglutamine. Also included are thealuminum salts of the compounds of the present invention. Further basesalts of the present invention include, but are not limited to: copper,ferric, ferrous, lithium, magnesium, manganic, manganous, potassium,sodium and zinc salts. Organic base salts include, but are not limitedto, salts of primary, secondary and tertiary amines, substituted aminesincluding naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines andbasic ion exchange resins, e.g., arginine, betaine, caffeine,chloroprocaine, choline, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine(benzathine),dicyclohexylamine, diethanolamine, 2-diethylaminoethanol,2-dimethylaminoethanol, ethanolamine, ethylenediamine,N-ethylmorpholine, N-ethylpiperidine, glucamine, glucosamine, histidine,hydrabamine, iso-propylamine, lidocaine, lysine, meglumine,N-methyl-D-glucamine, morpholine, piperazine, piperidine, polyamineresins, procaine, purines, theobromine, triethanolamine, triethylamine,trimethylamine, tripropylamine and tris-(hydroxymethyl)-methylamine(tromethamine). It should be recognized that the free acid forms willtypically differ from their respective salt forms somewhat in physicalproperties such as solubility in polar solvents, but otherwise the saltsare equivalent to their respective free acid forms for the purposes ofthe present invention.

Compounds of the present invention that comprise basicnitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with such agents as (C₁₋₄)alkyl halides, e.g., methyl, ethyl, iso-propyl and tert-butyl chlorides,bromides and iodides; di(C₁₋₄) alkyl sulfates, e.g., dimethyl, diethyland diamyl sulfates; (C₁₀₋₁₈) alkyl halides, e.g., decyl, dodecyl,lauryl, myristyl and stearyl chlorides, bromides and iodides; andaryl(C₁₋₄) alkyl halides, e.g., benzyl chloride and phenethyl bromide.Such salts permit the preparation of both water-soluble and oil-solublecompounds of the present invention.

N-oxides of compounds according to the present invention can be preparedby methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. For example,N-oxides can be prepared by treating an unoxidized form of the compoundwith an oxidizing agent (e.g., trifluoroperacetic acid, permaleic acid,perbenzoic acid, peracetic acid, meta-chloroperoxybenzoic acid, or thelike) in a suitable inert organic solvent (e.g., a halogenatedhydrocarbon such as dichloromethane) at approximately 0° C.Alternatively, the N-oxides of the compounds can be prepared from theN-oxide of an appropriate starting material.

Prodrug derivatives of compounds according to the present invention canbe prepared by modifying substituents of compounds of the presentinvention that are then converted in vivo to a different substituent. Itis noted that in many instances, the prodrugs themselves also fallwithin the scope of the range of compounds according to the presentinvention. For example, prodrugs can be prepared by reacting a compoundwith a carbamylating agent (e.g., 1,1-acyloxyalkylcarbonochloridate,para-nitrophenyl carbonate, or the like) or an acylating agent. Furtherexamples of methods of making prodrugs are described in Saulnier et al.(1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, Vol. 4, p. 1985.

Protected derivatives of compounds of the present invention can also bemade. Examples of techniques applicable to the creation of protectinggroups and their removal can be found in T. W. Greene, Protecting Groupsin Organic Synthesis, 3^(rd) edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1999.

Compounds of the present invention may also be conveniently prepared, orformed during the process of the invention, as solvates (e.g.,hydrates). Hydrates of compounds of the present invention may beconveniently prepared by recrystallization from an aqueous/organicsolvent mixture, using organic solvents such as dioxin, tetrahydrofuranor methanol.

A “pharmaceutically acceptable salt”, as used herein, is intended toencompass any compound according to the present invention that isutilized in the form of a salt thereof, especially where the saltconfers on the compound improved pharmacokinetic properties as comparedto the free form of compound or a different salt form of the compound.The pharmaceutically acceptable salt form may also initially conferdesirable pharmacokinetic properties on the compound that it did notpreviously possess, and may even positively affect the pharmacodynamicsof the compound with respect to its therapeutic activity in the body. Anexample of a pharmacokinetic property that may be favorably affected isthe manner in which the compound is transported across cell membranes,which in turn may directly and positively affect the absorption,distribution, biotransformation and excretion of the compound. While theroute of administration of the pharmaceutical composition is important,and various anatomical, physiological and pathological factors cancritically affect bioavailability, the solubility of the compound isusually dependent upon the character of the particular salt formthereof, which it utilized. One of skill in the art will appreciate thatan aqueous solution of the compound will provide the most rapidabsorption of the compound into the body of a subject being treated,while lipid solutions and suspensions, as well as solid dosage forms,will result in less rapid absorption of the compound.

Preparation of MEK Inhibitors

Various methods may be developed for synthesizing compounds according tothe present invention. Representative methods for synthesizing thesecompounds are provided in the Examples. It is noted, however, thatcompounds of the present invention may also be synthesized by othersynthetic routes that others may devise.

It will be readily recognized that certain compounds according to thepresent invention have atoms with linkages to other atoms that confer aparticular stereochemistry to the compound (e.g., chiral centers). It isrecognized that synthesis of compounds according to the presentinvention may result in the creation of mixtures of differentstereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers and diastereomers). Unless a particularstereochemistry is specified, recitation of a compound is intended toencompass all of the different possible stereoisomers.

Various methods for separating mixtures of different stereoisomers areknown in the art. For example, a racemic mixture of a compound may bereacted with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair ofdiastereoisomeric compounds. The diastereomers may then be separated inorder to recover the optically pure enantiomers. Dissociable complexesmay also be used to resolve enantiomers (e.g., crystallinediastereoisomeric salts). Diastereomers typically have sufficientlydistinct physical properties (e.g., melting points, boiling points,solubilities, reactivity, etc.) that they can be readily separated bytaking advantage of these dissimilarities. For example, diastereomerscan typically be separated by chromatography or by separation/resolutiontechniques based upon differences in solubility. A more detaileddescription of techniques that can be used to resolve stereoisomers ofcompounds from their racemic mixture can be found in Jean Jacques AndreCollet, Samuel H. Wilen, Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, JohnWiley & Sons, Inc. (1981).

Compositions Comprising MEK Inhibitors

A wide variety of compositions and administration methods may be used inconjunction with the compounds of the present invention. Suchcompositions may include, in addition to the compounds of the presentinvention, conventional pharmaceutical excipients, and otherconventional, pharmaceutically inactive agents. Additionally, thecompositions may include active agents in addition to the compounds ofthe present invention. These additional active agents may includeadditional compounds according to the invention, and/or one or moreother pharmaceutically active agents.

The compositions may be in gaseous, liquid, semi-liquid or solid form,formulated in a manner suitable for the route of administration to beused. For oral administration, capsules and tablets are typically used.For parenteral administration, reconstitution of a lyophilized powder,prepared as described herein, is typically used.

Compositions comprising compounds of the present invention may beadministered or coadministered orally, parenterally, intraperitoneally,intravenously, intraarterially, transdermally, sublingually,intramuscularly, rectally, transbuccally, intranasally, liposomally, viainhalation, vaginally, intraoccularly, via local delivery (for exampleby catheter or stent), subcutaneously, intraadiposally,intraarticularly, or intrathecally. The compounds and/or compositionsaccording to the invention may also be administered or coadministered inslow release dosage forms.

The MEK inhibitors and compositions comprising them may be administeredor coadministered in any conventional dosage form. Co-administration inthe context of this invention is intended to mean the administration ofmore than one therapeutic agent, one of which includes a MEK inhibitor,in the course of a coordinated treatment to achieve an improved clinicaloutcome. Such co-administration may also be coextensive, that is,occurring during overlapping periods of time.

Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, subcutaneous,or topical application may optionally include one or more of thefollowing components: a sterile diluent, such as water for injection,saline solution, fixed oil, polyethylene glycol, glycerine, propyleneglycol or other synthetic solvent; antimicrobial agents, such as benzylalcohol and methyl parabens; antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid andsodium bisulfate; chelating agents, such as ethylenediaminetetraaceticacid (EDTA); buffers, such as acetates, citrates and phosphates; agentsfor the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose, andagents for adjusting the acidity or alkalinity of the composition, suchas alkaline or acidifying agents or buffers like carbonates,bicarbonates, phosphates, hydrochloric acid, and organic acids likeacetic and citric acid. Parenteral preparations may optionally beenclosed in ampules, disposable syringes or single or multiple dosevials made of glass, plastic or other suitable material.

When compounds according to the present invention exhibit insufficientsolubility, methods for solubilizing the compounds may be used. Suchmethods are known to those of skill in this art, and include, but arenot limited to, using cosolvents, such as dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO),using surfactants, such as TWEEN, or dissolution in aqueous sodiumbicarbonate. Derivatives of the compounds, such as prodrugs of thecompounds may also be used in formulating effective pharmaceuticalcompositions.

Upon mixing or adding compounds according to the present invention to acomposition, a solution, suspension, emulsion or the like may be formed.The form of the resulting composition will depend upon a number offactors, including the intended mode of administration, and thesolubility of the compound in the selected carrier or vehicle. Theeffective concentration needed to ameliorate the disease being treatedmay be empirically determined.

Compositions according to the present invention are optionally providedfor administration to humans and animals in unit dosage forms, such astablets, capsules, pills, powders, dry powders for inhalers, granules,sterile parenteral solutions or suspensions, and oral solutions orsuspensions, and oil-water emulsions containing suitable quantities ofthe compounds, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable salts,preferably the sodium salts, thereof. The pharmaceuticallytherapeutically active compounds and derivatives thereof are typicallyformulated and administered in unit-dosage forms or multiple-dosageforms. Unit-dose forms, as used herein, refers to physically discreteunits suitable for human and animal subjects and packaged individuallyas is known in the art. Each unit-dose contains a predetermined quantityof the therapeutically active compound sufficient to produce the desiredtherapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceuticalcarrier, vehicle or diluent. Examples of unit-dose forms includeampoules and syringes individually packaged tablet or capsule. Unit-doseforms may be administered in fractions or multiples thereof. Amultiple-dose form is a plurality of identical unit-dosage formspackaged in a single container to be administered in segregatedunit-dose form. Examples of multiple-dose forms include vials, bottlesof tablets or capsules or bottles of pint or gallons. Hence, multipledose form is a multiple of unit-doses that are not segregated inpackaging.

In addition to one or more compounds according to the present invention,the composition may comprise: a diluent such as lactose, sucrose,dicalcium phosphate, or carboxymethylcellulose; a lubricant, such asmagnesium stearate, calcium stearate and talc; and a binder such asstarch, natural gums, such as gum acaciagelatin, glucose, molasses,polyinylpyrrolidine, celluloses and derivatives thereof, povidone,crospovidones and other such binders known to those of skill in the art.Liquid pharmaceutically administrable compositions can, for example, beprepared by dissolving, dispersing, or otherwise mixing an activecompound as defined above and optional pharmaceutical adjuvants in acarrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose,glycerol, glycols, ethanol, and the like, to form a solution orsuspension. If desired, the pharmaceutical composition to beadministered may also contain minor amounts of auxiliary substances suchas wetting agents, emulsifying agents, or solubilizing agents, pHbuffering agents and the like, for example, acetate, sodium citrate,cyclodextrine derivatives, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamine sodiumacetate, triethanolamine oleate, and other such agents. Actual methodsof preparing such dosage forms are known in the art, or will beapparent, to those skilled in this art; for example, see Remington'sPharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pa., 15thEdition, 1975. The composition or formulation to be administered will,in any event, contain a sufficient quantity of a inhibitor of thepresent invention to reduce MEK activity in vivo, thereby treating thedisease state of the subject.

Dosage forms or compositions may optionally comprise one or morecompounds according to the present invention in the range of 0.005% to100% (weight/weight) with the balance comprising additional substancessuch as those described herein. For oral administration, apharmaceutically acceptable composition may optionally comprise any oneor more commonly employed excipients, such as, for examplepharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, magnesium stearate,talcum, cellulose derivatives, sodium crosscarmellose, glucose, sucrose,magnesium carbonate, sodium saccharin, talcum. Such compositions includesolutions, suspensions, tablets, capsules, powders, dry powders forinhalers and sustained release formulations, such as, but not limitedto, implants and microencapsulated delivery systems, and biodegradable,biocompatible polymers, such as collagen, ethylene vinyl acetate,polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, polyorthoesters, polylactic acid andothers. Methods for preparing these formulations are known to thoseskilled in the art. The compositions may optionally contain 0.01%-100%(weight/weight) of one or more MEK inhibitors, optionally 0.1-95%, andoptionally 1-95%.

Salts, preferably sodium salts, of the inhibitors may be prepared withcarriers that protect the compound against rapid elimination from thebody, such as time release formulations or coatings. The formulationsmay further include other active compounds to obtain desiredcombinations of properties.

Formulations for Oral Administration

Oral pharmaceutical dosage forms may be as a solid, gel or liquid.Examples of solid dosage forms include, but are not limited to tablets,capsules, granules, and bulk powders. More specific examples of oraltablets include compressed, chewable lozenges and tablets that may beenteric-coated, sugar-coated or film-coated. Examples of capsulesinclude hard or soft gelatin capsules. Granules and powders may beprovided in non-effervescent or effervescent forms. Each may be combinedwith other ingredients known to those skilled in the art.

In certain embodiments, compounds according to the present invention areprovided as solid dosage forms, preferably capsules or tablets. Thetablets, pills, capsules, troches and the like may optionally containone or more of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similarnature: a binder; a diluent; a disintegrating agent; a lubricant; aglidant; a sweetening agent; and a flavoring agent.

Examples of binders that may be used include, but are not limited to,microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth, glucose solution, acaciamucilage, gelatin solution, sucrose and starch paste.

Examples of lubricants that may be used include, but are not limited to,talc, starch, magnesium or calcium stearate, lycopodium and stearicacid.

Examples of diluents that may be used include, but are not limited to,lactose, sucrose, starch, kaolin, salt, mannitol and dicalciumphosphate.

Examples of glidants that may be used include, but are not limited to,colloidal silicon dioxide.

Examples of disintegrating agents that may be used include, but are notlimited to, crosscarmellose sodium, sodium starch glycolate, alginicacid, corn starch, potato starch, bentonite, methylcellulose, agar andcarboxymethylcellulose.

Examples of coloring agents that may be used include, but are notlimited to, any of the approved certified water-soluble FD and C dyes,mixtures thereof; and water insoluble FD and C dyes suspended on aluminahydrate.

Examples of sweetening agents that may be used include, but are notlimited to, sucrose, lactose, mannitol and artificial sweetening agentssuch as sodium cyclamate and saccharin, and any number of spray-driedflavors.

Examples of flavoring agents that may be used include, but are notlimited to, natural flavors extracted from plants such as fruits andsynthetic blends of compounds that produce a pleasant sensation, suchas, but not limited to peppermint and methyl salicylate.

Examples of wetting agents that may be used include, but are not limitedto, propylene glycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethyleneglycol monolaurate and polyoxyethylene lauryl ether.

Examples of anti-emetic coatings that may be used include, but are notlimited to, fatty acids, fats, waxes, shellac, ammoniated shellac andcellulose acetate phthalates.

Examples of film coatings that may be used include, but are not limitedto, hydroxyethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, polyethyleneglycol 4000 and cellulose acetate phthalate.

If oral administration is desired, the salt of the compound mayoptionally be provided in a composition that protects it from the acidicenvironment of the stomach. For example, the composition can beformulated in an enteric coating that maintains its integrity in thestomach and releases the active compound in the intestine. Thecomposition may also be formulated in combination with an antacid orother such ingredient.

When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may optionally additionallycomprise a liquid carrier such as a fatty oil. In addition, dosage unitforms may optionally additionally comprise various other materials thatmodify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, coatings ofsugar and other enteric agents.

Compounds according to the present invention may also be administered asa component of an elixir, suspension, syrup, wafer, sprinkle, chewinggum or the like. A syrup may optionally comprise, in addition to theactive compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certainpreservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors.

The compounds of the present invention may also be mixed with otheractive materials that do not impair the desired action, or withmaterials that supplement the desired action, such as antacids, H2blockers, and diuretics. For example, if a compound is used for treatingasthma or hypertension, it may be used with other bronchodilators andantihypertensive agents, respectively.

Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be included intablets comprising compounds of the present invention include, but arenot limited to binders, lubricants, diluents, disintegrating agents,coloring agents, flavoring agents, and wetting agents. Enteric-coatedtablets, because of the enteric-coating, resist the action of stomachacid and dissolve or disintegrate in the neutral or alkaline intestines.Sugar-coated tablets may be compressed tablets to which different layersof pharmaceutically acceptable substances are applied. Film-coatedtablets may be compressed tablets that have been coated with polymers orother suitable coating. Multiple compressed tablets may be compressedtablets made by more than one compression cycle utilizing thepharmaceutically acceptable substances previously mentioned. Coloringagents may also be used in tablets. Flavoring and sweetening agents maybe used in tablets, and are especially useful in the formation ofchewable tablets and lozenges.

Examples of liquid oral dosage forms that may be used include, but arenot limited to, aqueous solutions, emulsions, suspensions, solutionsand/or suspensions reconstituted from non-effervescent granules andeffervescent preparations reconstituted from effervescent granules.

Examples of aqueous solutions that may be used include, but are notlimited to, elixirs and syrups. As used herein, elixirs refer to clear,sweetened, hydroalcoholic preparations. Examples of pharmaceuticallyacceptable carriers that may be used in elixirs include, but are notlimited to solvents. Particular examples of solvents that may be usedinclude glycerin, sorbitol, ethyl alcohol and syrup. As used herein,syrups refer to concentrated aqueous solutions of a sugar, for example,sucrose. Syrups may optionally further comprise a preservative.

Emulsions refer to two-phase systems in which one liquid is dispersed inthe form of small globules throughout another liquid. Emulsions mayoptionally be oil-in-water or water-in-oil emulsions. Examples ofpharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may be used in emulsionsinclude, but are not limited to non-aqueous liquids, emulsifying agentsand preservatives.

Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable substances that may be used innon-effervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosageform, include diluents, sweeteners and wetting agents.

Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable substances that may be used ineffervescent granules, to be reconstituted into a liquid oral dosageform, include organic acids and a source of carbon dioxide.

Coloring and flavoring agents may optionally be used in all of the abovedosage forms.

Particular examples of preservatives that may be used include glycerin,methyl and propylparaben, benzoic add, sodium benzoate and alcohol.

Particular examples of non-aqueous liquids that may be used in emulsionsinclude mineral oil and cottonseed oil.

Particular examples of emulsifying agents that may be used includegelatin, acacia, tragacanth, bentonite, and surfactants such aspolyoxyethylene sorbitan monooleate.

Particular examples of suspending agents that may be used include sodiumcarboxymethylcellulose, pectin, tragacanth, Veegum and acacia. Diluentsinclude lactose and sucrose. Sweetening agents include sucrose, syrups,glycerin and artificial sweetening agents such as sodium cyclamate andsaccharin.

Particular examples of wetting agents that may be used include propyleneglycol monostearate, sorbitan monooleate, diethylene glycol monolaurateand polyoxyethylene lauryl ether.

Particular examples of organic acids that may be used include citric andtartaric acid.

Sources of carbon dioxide that may be used in effervescent compositionsinclude sodium bicarbonate and sodium carbonate. Coloring agents includeany of the approved certified water soluble FD and C dyes, and mixturesthereof.

Particular examples of flavoring agents that may be used include naturalflavors extracted from plants such fruits, and synthetic blends ofcompounds that produce a pleasant taste sensation.

For a solid dosage form, the solution or suspension, in for examplepropylene carbonate, vegetable oils or triglycerides, is preferablyencapsulated in a gelatin capsule. Such solutions, and the preparationand encapsulation thereof, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,328,245;4,409,239; and 4,410,545. For a liquid dosage form, the solution, e.g.,for example, in a polyethylene glycol, may be diluted with a sufficientquantity of a pharmaceutically acceptable liquid carrier, e.g., water,to be easily measured for administration.

Alternatively, liquid or semi-solid oral formulations may be prepared bydissolving or dispersing the active compound or salt in vegetable oils,glycols, triglycerides, propylene glycol esters (e.g., propylenecarbonate) and other such carriers, and encapsulating these solutions orsuspensions in hard or soft gelatin capsule shells. Other usefulformulations include those set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. Re 28,819 and4,358,603.

Injectables, Solutions, and Emulsions

The present invention is also directed to compositions designed toadminister the compounds of the present invention by parenteraladministration, generally characterized by subcutaneous, intramuscularor intravenous injection. Injectables may be prepared in anyconventional form, for example as liquid solutions or suspensions, solidforms suitable for solution or suspension in liquid prior to injection,or as emulsions.

Examples of excipients that may be used in conjunction with injectablesaccording to the present invention include, but are not limited towater, saline, dextrose, glycerol or ethanol. The injectablecompositions may also optionally comprise minor amounts of non-toxicauxiliary substances such as wetting or emulsifying agents, pH bufferingagents, stabilizers, solubility enhancers, and other such agents, suchas for example, sodium acetate, sorbitan monolaurate, triethanolamineoleate and cyclodextrins. Implantation of a slow-release orsustained-release system, such that a constant level of dosage ismaintained (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,710,795) is also contemplatedherein. The percentage of active compound contained in such parenteralcompositions is highly dependent on the specific nature thereof, as wellas the activity of the compound and the needs of the subject.

Parenteral administration of the formulations includes intravenous,subcutaneous and intramuscular administrations. Preparations forparenteral administration include sterile solutions ready for injection,sterile dry soluble products, such as the lyophilized powders describedherein, ready to be combined with a solvent just prior to use, includinghypodermic tablets, sterile suspensions ready for injection, sterile dryinsoluble products ready to be combined with a vehicle just prior to useand sterile emulsions. The solutions may be either aqueous ornonaqueous.

When administered intravenously, examples of suitable carriers include,but are not limited to physiological saline or phosphate buffered saline(PBS), and solutions containing thickening and solubilizing agents, suchas glucose, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol and mixturesthereof.

Examples of pharmaceutically acceptable carriers that may optionally beused in parenteral preparations include, but are not limited to aqueousvehicles, nonaqueous vehicles, antimicrobial agents, isotonic agents,buffers, antioxidants, local anesthetics, suspending and dispersingagents, emulsifying agents, sequestering or chelating agents and otherpharmaceutically acceptable substances.

Examples of aqueous vehicles that may optionally be used include SodiumChloride Injection, Ringers Injection, Isotonic Dextrose Injection,Sterile Water Injection, Dextrose and Lactated Ringers Injection.

Examples of nonaqueous parenteral vehicles that may optionally be usedinclude fixed oils of vegetable origin, cottonseed oil, corn oil, sesameoil and peanut oil.

Antimicrobial agents in bacteriostatic or fungistatic concentrations maybe added to parenteral preparations, particularly when the preparationsare packaged in multiple-dose containers and thus designed to be storedand multiple aliquots to be removed. Examples of antimicrobial agentsthat may be used include phenols or cresols, mercurials, benzyl alcohol,chlorobutanol, methyl and propyl p-hydroxybenzoic acid esters,thimerosal, benzalkonium chloride and benzethonium chloride.

Examples of isotonic agents that may be used include sodium chloride anddextrose. Examples of buffers that may be used include phosphate andcitrate. Examples of antioxidants that may be used include sodiumbisulfate. Examples of local anesthetics that may be used includeprocaine hydrochloride. Examples of suspending and dispersing agentsthat may be used include sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Examples of emulsifying agentsthat may be used include Polysorbate 80 (TWEEN 80). A sequestering orchelating agent of metal ions includes EDTA.

Pharmaceutical carriers may also optionally include ethyl alcohol,polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol for water miscible vehicles andsodium hydroxide, hydrochloric acid, citric acid or lactic acid for pHadjustment.

The concentration of an inhibitor in the parenteral formulation may beadjusted so that an injection administers a pharmaceutically effectiveamount sufficient to produce the desired pharmacological effect. Theexact concentration of an inhibitor and/or dosage to be used willultimately depend on the age, weight and condition of the patient oranimal as is known in the art.

Unit-dose parenteral preparations may be packaged in an ampoule, a vialor a syringe with a needle. All preparations for parenteraladministration should be sterile, as is know and practiced in the art.

Injectables may be designed for local and systemic administration.Typically a therapeutically effective dosage is formulated to contain aconcentration of at least about 0.1% w/w up to about 90% w/w or more,preferably more than 1% w/w of the MEK inhibitor to the treatedtissue(s). The inhibitor may be administered at once, or may be dividedinto a number of smaller doses to be administered at intervals of time.It is understood that the precise dosage and duration of treatment willbe a function of the location of where the composition is parenterallyadministered, the carrier and other variables that may be determinedempirically using known testing protocols or by extrapolation from invivo or in vitro test data. It is to be noted that concentrations anddosage values may also vary with the age of the individual treated. Itis to be further understood that for any particular subject, specificdosage regimens may need to be adjusted over time according to theindividual need and the professional judgment of the personadministering or supervising the administration of the formulations.Hence, the concentration ranges set forth herein are intended to beexemplary and are not intended to limit the scope or practice of theclaimed formulations.

The MEK inhibitor may optionally be suspended in micronized or othersuitable form or may be derivatized to produce a more soluble activeproduct or to produce a prodrug. The form of the resulting mixturedepends upon a number of factors, including the intended mode ofadministration and the solubility of the compound in the selectedcarrier or vehicle. The effective concentration is sufficient forameliorating the symptoms of the disease state and may be empiricallydetermined.

Lyophilized Powders

The compounds of the present invention may also be prepared aslyophilized powders, which can be reconstituted for administration assolutions, emulsions and other mixtures. The lyophilized powders mayalso be formulated as solids or gels.

Sterile, lyophilized powder may be prepared by dissolving the compoundin a sodium phosphate buffer solution containing dextrose or othersuitable excipient. Subsequent sterile filtration of the solutionfollowed by lyophilization under standard conditions known to those ofskill in the art provides the desired formulation. Briefly, thelyophilized powder may optionally be prepared by dissolving dextrose,sorbitol, fructose, corn syrup, xylitol, glycerin, glucose, sucrose orother suitable agent, about 1-20%, preferably about 5 to 15%, in asuitable buffer, such as citrate, sodium or potassium phosphate or othersuch buffer known to those of skill in the art at, typically, aboutneutral pH. Then, a MEK inhibitor is added to the resulting mixture,preferably above room temperature, more preferably at about 30-35° C.,and stirred until it dissolves. The resulting mixture is diluted byadding more buffer to a desired concentration. The resulting mixture issterile filtered or treated to remove particulates and to insuresterility, and apportioned into vials for lyophilization. Each vial maycontain a single dosage or multiple dosages of the inhibitor.

Topical Administration

The compounds of the present invention may also be administered astopical mixtures. Topical mixtures may be used for local and systemicadministration. The resulting mixture may be a solution, suspension,emulsions or the like and are formulated as creams, gels, ointments,emulsions, solutions, elixirs, lotions, suspensions, tinctures, pastes,foams, aerosols, irrigations, sprays, suppositories, bandages, dermalpatches or any other formulations suitable for topical administration.

The MEK inhibitors may be formulated as aerosols for topicalapplication, such as by inhalation (see, U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,044,126,4,414,209, and 4,364,923, which describe aerosols for delivery of asteroid useful for treatment of inflammatory diseases, particularlyasthma). These formulations for administration to the respiratory tractcan be in the form of an aerosol or solution for a nebulizer, or as amicrofine powder for insufflation, alone or in combination with an inertcarrier such as lactose. In such a case, the particles of theformulation will typically have diameters of less than 50 microns,preferably less than 10 microns.

The inhibitors may also be formulated for local or topical application,such as for topical application to the skin and mucous membranes, suchas in the eye, in the form of gels, creams, and lotions and forapplication to the eye or for intracisternal or intraspinal application.Topical administration is contemplated for transdermal delivery and alsofor administration to the eyes or mucosa, or for inhalation therapies.Nasal solutions of the MEK inhibitor alone or in combination with otherpharmaceutically acceptable excipients can also be administered.

Formulations for Other Routes of Administrations

Depending upon the disease state being treated, other routes ofadministration, such as topical application, transdermal patches, andrectal administration, may also be used. For example, pharmaceuticaldosage forms for rectal administration are rectal suppositories,capsules and tablets for systemic effect. Rectal suppositories are usedherein mean solid bodies for insertion into the rectum that melt orsoften at body temperature releasing one or more pharmacologically ortherapeutically active ingredients. Pharmaceutically acceptablesubstances utilized in rectal suppositories are bases or vehicles andagents to raise the melting point. Examples of bases include cocoabutter (theobroma oil), glycerin-gelatin, carbowax, (polyoxyethyleneglycol) and appropriate mixtures of mono-, di- and triglycerides offatty acids. Combinations of the various bases may be used. Agents toraise the melting point of suppositories include spermaceti and wax.Rectal suppositories may be prepared either by the compressed method orby molding. The typical weight of a rectal suppository is about 2 to 3gm. Tablets and capsules for rectal administration may be manufacturedusing the same pharmaceutically acceptable substance and by the samemethods as for formulations for oral administration.

Examples of Formulations

The following are particular examples of oral, intravenous and tabletformulations that may optionally be used with compounds of the presentinvention. It is noted that these formulations may be varied dependingon the particular compound being used and the indication for which theformulation is going to be used.

ORAL FORMULATION Compound of the Present Invention 10-100 mg Citric AcidMonohydrate 105 mg Sodium Hydroxide 18 mg Flavoring Water q.s. to 100 mLINTRAVENOUS FORMULATION Compound of the Present Invention 0.1-10 mgDextrose Monohydrate q.s. to make isotonic Citric Acid Monohydrate 1.05mg Sodium Hydroxide 0.18 mg Water for Injection q.s. to 1.0 mL TABLETFORMULATION Compound of the Present Invention  1% MicrocrystallineCellulose 73% Stearic Acid 25% Colloidal Silica  1%.

Kits Comprising MEK Inhibitors

The invention is also directed to kits and other articles of manufacturefor treating diseases associated with MEK. It is noted that diseases areintended to cover all conditions for which the MEK possess activity thatcontributes to the pathology and/or symptomology of the condition.

In one embodiment, a kit is provided that comprises a compositioncomprising at least one inhibitor of the present invention incombination with instructions. The instructions may indicate the diseasestate for which the composition is to be administered, storageinformation, dosing information and/or instructions regarding how toadminister the composition. The kit may also comprise packagingmaterials. The packaging material may comprise a container for housingthe composition. The kit may also optionally comprise additionalcomponents, such as syringes for administration of the composition. Thekit may comprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.

In another embodiment, an article of manufacture is provided thatcomprises a composition comprising at least one inhibitor of the presentinvention in combination with packaging materials. The packagingmaterial may comprise a container for housing the composition. Thecontainer may optionally comprise a label indicating the disease statefor which the composition is to be administered, storage information,dosing information and/or instructions regarding how to administer thecomposition. The kit may also optionally comprise additional components,such as syringes for administration of the composition. The kit maycomprise the composition in single or multiple dose forms.

It is noted that the packaging material used in kits and articles ofmanufacture according to the present invention may form a plurality ofdivided containers such as a divided bottle or a divided foil packet.The container can be in any conventional shape or form as known in theart which is made of a pharmaceutically acceptable material, for examplea paper or cardboard box, a glass or plastic bottle or jar, are-sealable bag (for example, to hold a “refill” of tablets forplacement into a different container), or a blister pack with individualdoses for pressing out of the pack according to a therapeutic schedule.The container that is employed will depend on the exact dosage forminvolved, for example a conventional cardboard box would not generallybe used to hold a liquid suspension. It is feasible that more than onecontainer can be used together in a single package to market a singledosage form. For example, tablets may be contained in a bottle that isin turn contained within a box. Typically the kit includes directionsfor the administration of the separate components. The kit form isparticularly advantageous when the separate components are preferablyadministered in different dosage forms (e.g., oral, topical, transdermaland parenteral), are administered at different dosage intervals, or whentitration of the individual components of the combination is desired bythe prescribing physician.

One particular example of a kit according to the present invention is aso-called blister pack. Blister packs are well known in the packagingindustry and are being widely used for the packaging of pharmaceuticalunit dosage forms (tablets, capsules, and the like). Blister packsgenerally consist of a sheet of relatively stiff material covered with afoil of a preferably transparent plastic material. During the packagingprocess recesses are formed in the plastic foil. The recesses have thesize and shape of individual tablets or capsules to be packed or mayhave the size and shape to accommodate multiple tablets and/or capsulesto be packed. Next, the tablets or capsules are placed in the recessesaccordingly and the sheet of relatively stiff material is sealed againstthe plastic foil at the face of the foil which is opposite from thedirection in which the recesses were formed. As a result, the tablets orcapsules are individually sealed or collectively sealed, as desired, inthe recesses between the plastic foil and the sheet. Preferably thestrength of the sheet is such that the tablets or capsules can beremoved from the blister pack by manually applying pressure on therecesses whereby an opening is formed in the sheet at the place of therecess. The tablet or capsule can then be removed via said opening.

Another specific embodiment of a kit is a dispenser designed to dispensethe daily doses one at a time in the order of their intended use.Preferably, the dispenser is equipped with a memory-aid, so as tofurther facilitate compliance with the regimen. An example of such amemory-aid is a mechanical counter that indicates the number of dailydoses that has been dispensed. Another example of such a memory-aid is abattery-powered micro-chip memory coupled with a liquid crystal readout,or audible reminder signal which, for example, reads out the date thatthe last daily dose has been taken and/or reminds one when the next doseis to be taken.

Dosage, Host and Safety

The compounds of the present invention are stable and can be usedsafely. In particular, the compounds of the present invention are usefulas MEK inhibitors for a variety of subjects (e.g., humans, non-humanmammals and non-mammals). The optimal dose may vary depending upon suchconditions as, for example, the type of subject, the body weight of thesubject, the route of administration, and specific properties of theparticular compound being used. In general, the daily dose for oraladministration to an adult (body weight of about 60 kg) is about 1 to1000 mg, about 3 to 300 mg, or about 10 to 200 mg. It will beappreciated that the daily dose can be given in a single administrationor in multiple (e.g., 2 or 3) portions a day.

Combination Therapy

A wide variety therapeutic agents may have a therapeutic additive orsynergistic effect with MEK inhibitors according to the presentinvention. Such therapeutic agents may addictively or synergisticallycombine with the MEK inhibitors to inhibit undesirable cell growth, suchas inappropriate cell growth resulting in undesirable benign conditionsor tumor growth.

In one embodiment, a method is provided for treating a cellproliferative disease state comprising treating cells with a compoundaccording to the present invention in combination with ananti-proliferative agent, wherein the cells are treated with thecompound according to the present invention before, at the same time,and/or after the cells are treated with the anti-proliferative agent,referred to herein as combination therapy. It is noted that treatment ofone agent before another is referred to herein as sequential therapy,even if the agents are also administered together. It is noted thatcombination therapy is intended to cover when agents are administeredbefore or after each other (sequential therapy) as well as when theagents are administered at the same time.

Examples of therapeutic agents that may be used in combination with MEKinhibitors include, but are not limited to, anticancer agents,alkylating agents, antibiotic agents, antimetabolic agents, hormonalagents, plant-derived agents, and biologic agents.

Alkylating agents are polyfunctional compounds that have the ability tosubstitute alkyl groups for hydrogen ions. Examples of alkylating agentsinclude, but are not limited to, bischloroethylamines (nitrogenmustards, e.g. chlorambucil, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide,mechlorethamine, melphalan, uracil mustard), aziridines (e.g. thiotepa),alkyl alkone sulfonates (e.g. busulfan), nitrosoureas (e.g. carmustine,lomustine, streptozocin), nonclassic alkylating agents (altretamine,dacarbazine, and procarbazine), platinum compounds (carboplastin andcisplatin). These compounds react with phosphate, amino, hydroxyl,sulfihydryl, carboxyl, and imidazole groups. Under physiologicalconditions, these drugs ionize and produce positively charged ion thatattach to susceptible nucleic acids and proteins, leading to cell cyclearrest and/or cell death. Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitorand an alkylating agent may have therapeutic synergistic effects oncancer and reduce sides affects associated with these chemotherapeuticagents.

Antibiotic agents are a group of drugs that produced in a manner similarto antibiotics as a modification of natural products. Examples ofantibiotic agents include, but are not limited to, anthracyclines (e.g.doxorubicin, daunorubicin, epirubicin, idarubicin and anthracenedione),mitomycin C, bleomycin, dactinomycin, plicatomycin. These antibioticagents interferes with cell growth by targeting different cellularcomponents. For example, anthracyclines are generally believed tointerfere with the action of DNA topoisomerase II in the regions oftranscriptionally active DNA, which leads to DNA strand scissions.Bleomycin is generally believed to chelate iron and forms an activatedcomplex, which then binds to bases of DNA, causing strand scissions andcell death. Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitor and anantibiotic agent may have therapeutic synergistic effects on cancer andreduce sides affects associated with these chemotherapeutic agents.

Antimetabolic agents are a group of drugs that interfere with metabolicprocesses vital to the physiology and proliferation of cancer cells.Actively proliferating cancer cells require continuous synthesis oflarge quantities of nucleic acids, proteins, lipids, and other vitalcellular constituents. Many of the antimetabolites inhibit the synthesisof purine or pyrimidine nucleosides or inhibit the enzymes of DNAreplication. Some antimetabolites also interfere with the synthesis ofribonucleosides and RNA and/or amino acid metabolism and proteinsynthesis as well. By interfering with the synthesis of vital cellularconstituents, antimetabolites can delay or arrest the growth of cancercells. Examples of antimetabolic agents include, but are not limited to,fluorouracil (5-FU), floxuridine (5-FUdR), methotrexate, leucovorin,hydroxyurea, thioguanine (6-TG), mercaptopurine (6-MP), cytarabine,pentostatin, fludarabine phosphate, cladribine (2-CDA), asparaginase,and gemcitabine. Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitor and aantimetabolic agent may have therapeutic synergistic effects on cancerand reduce sides affects associated with these chemotherapeutic agents.

Hormonal agents are a group of drug that regulate the growth anddevelopment of their target organs. Most of the hormonal agents are sexsteroids and their derivatives and analogs thereof, such as estrogens,androgens, and progestins. These hormonal agents may serve asantagonists of receptors for the sex steroids to down regulate receptorexpression and transcription of vital genes. Examples of such hormonalagents are synthetic estrogens (e.g. diethylstibestrol), antiestrogens(e.g. tamoxifen, toremifene, fluoxymesterol and raloxifene),antiandrogens (bicalutamide, nilutamide, flutamide), aromataseinhibitors (e.g., aminoglutethimide, anastrozole and tetrazole),ketoconazole, goserelin acetate, leuprolide, megestrol acetate andmifepristone. Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitor and ahormonal agent may have therapeutic synergistic effects on cancer andreduce sides affects associated with these chemotherapeutic agents.

Plant-derived agents are a group of drugs that are derived from plantsor modified based on the molecular structure of the agents. Examples ofplant-derived agents include, but are not limited to, vinca alkaloids(e.g., vincristine, vinblastine, vindesine, vinzolidine andvinorelbine), podophyllotoxins (e.g., etoposide (VP-16) and teniposide(VM-26)), taxanes (e.g., paclitaxel and docetaxel). These plant-derivedagents generally act as antimitotic agents that bind to tubulin andinhibit mitosis. Podophyllotoxins such as etoposide are believed tointerfere with DNA synthesis by interacting with topoisomerase II,leading to DNA strand scission. Combination therapy including a MEKinhibitor and a plant-derived agent may have therapeutic synergisticeffects on cancer and reduce sides affects associated with thesechemotherapeutic agents.

Biologic agents are a group of biomolecules that elicit cancer/tumorregression when used alone or in combination with chemotherapy and/orradiotherapy. Examples of biologic agents include, but are not limitedto, immuno-modulating proteins such as cytokines, monoclonal antibodiesagainst tumor antigens, tumor suppressor genes, and cancer vaccines.Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitor and a biologic agent mayhave therapeutic synergistic effects on cancer, enhance the patient'simmune responses to tumorigenic signals, and reduce potential sidesaffects associated with this chemotherapeutic agent.

Cytokines possess profound immunomodulatory activity. Some cytokinessuch as interleukin-2 (IL-2, aldesleukin) and interferon havedemonstrated antitumor activity and have been approved for the treatmentof patients with metastatic renal cell carcinoma and metastaticmalignant melanoma. IL-2 is a T-cell growth factor that is central toT-cell-mediated immune responses. The selective antitumor effects ofIL-2 on some patients are believed to be the result of a cell-mediatedimmune response that discriminate between self and nonself. Examples ofinterleukins that may be used in conjunction with MEK inhibitor include,but are not limited to, interleukin 2 (IL-2), and interleukin 4 (IL-4),interleukin 12 (IL-12).

Interferon include more than 23 related subtypes with overlappingactivities, all of the IFN subtypes within the scope of the presentinvention. IFN has demonstrated activity against many solid andhematologic malignancies, the later appearing to be particularlysensitive.

Other cytokines that may be used in conjunction with a MEK inhibitorinclude those cytokines that exert profound effects on hematopoiesis andimmune functions. Examples of such cytokines include, but are notlimited to erythropoietin, granulocyte-CSF (filgrastin), andgranulocyte, macrophage-CSF (sargramostim). These cytokines may be usedin conjunction with a MEK inhibitor to reduce chemotherapy-inducedmyelopoietic toxicity.

Other immuno-modulating agents other than cytokines may also be used inconjunction with a MEK inhibitor to inhibit abnormal cell growth.Examples of such immuno-modulating agents include, but are not limitedto bacillus Calmette-Guerin, levamisole, and octreotide, a long-actingoctapeptide that mimics the effects of the naturally occurring hormonesomatostatin.

Monoclonal antibodies against tumor antigens are antibodies elicitedagainst antigens expressed by tumors, preferably tumor-specificantigens. For example, monoclonal antibody HERCEPTIN® (Trastruzumab) israised against human epidermal growth factor receptor2 (HER2) that isoverexpressed in some breast tumors including metastatic breast cancer.Overexpression of HER2 protein is associated with more aggressivedisease and poorer prognosis in the clinic. HERCEPTIN® is used as asingle agent for the treatment of patients with metastatic breast cancerwhose tumors over express the HER2 protein. Combination therapyincluding MEK inhibitor and HERCEPTIN® may have therapeutic synergisticeffects on tumors, especially on metastatic cancers.

Another example of monoclonal antibodies against tumor antigens isRITUXAN® (Rituximab) that is raised against CD20 on lymphoma cells andselectively deplete normal and malignant CD20⁺ pre-B and mature B cells.RITUXAN® is used as single agent for the treatment of patients withrelapsed or refractory low-grade or follicular, CD20+, B cellnon-Hodgkin's lymphoma. Combination therapy including MEK inhibitor andRITUXAN® may have therapeutic synergistic effects not only on lymphoma,but also on other forms or types of malignant tumors.

Tumor suppressor genes are genes that function to inhibit the cellgrowth and division cycles, thus preventing the development ofneoplasia. Mutations in tumor suppressor genes cause the cell to ignoreone or more of the components of the network of inhibitory signals,overcoming the cell cycle check points and resulting in a higher rate ofcontrolled cell growth—cancer. Examples of the tumor suppressor genesinclude, but are not limited to, DPC-4, NF-1, NF-2, RB, p53, WT1, BRCA1and BRCA2.

DPC-4 is involved in pancreatic cancer and participates in a cytoplasmicpathway that inhibits cell division. NF-1 codes for a protein thatinhibits Ras, a cytoplasmic inhibitory protein. NF-1 is involved inneurofibroma and pheochromocytomas of the nervous system and myeloidleukemia. NF-2 encodes a nuclear protein that is involved in meningioma,schwanoma, and ependymoma of the nervous system. RB codes for the pRBprotein, a nuclear protein that is a major inhibitor of cell cycle. RBis involved in retinoblastoma as well as bone, bladder, small cell lungand breast cancer. P53 codes for p53 protein that regulates celldivision and can induce apoptosis. Mutation and/or inaction of p53 isfound in a wide ranges of cancers. WT1 is involved in Wilms tumor of thekidneys. BRCA1 is involved in breast and ovarian cancer, and BRCA2 isinvolved in breast cancer. The tumor suppressor gene can be transferredinto the tumor cells where it exerts its tumor suppressing functions.Combination therapy including a MEK inhibitor and a tumor suppressor mayhave therapeutic synergistic effects on patients suffering from variousforms of cancers.

Cancer vaccines are a group of agents that induce the body's specificimmune response to tumors. Most of cancer vaccines under research anddevelopment and clinical trials are tumor-associated antigens (TAAs).TAA are structures (i.e. proteins, enzymes or carbohydrates) which arepresent on tumor cells and relatively absent or diminished on normalcells. By virtue of being fairly unique to the tumor cell, TAAs providetargets for the immune system to recognize and cause their destruction.Example of TAAs include, but are not limited to gangliosides (GM2),prostate specific antigen (PSA), alpha-fetoprotein (AFP),carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA) (produced by colon cancers and otheradenocarcinomas, e.g. breast, lung, gastric, and pancreas cancer s),melanoma associated antigens (MART-1, gp100, MAGE 1,3 tyrosinase),papillomavirus E6 and E7 fragments, whole cells or portions/lysates ofantologous tumor cells and allogeneic tumor cells.

An adjuvant may be used to augment the immune response to TAAs. Examplesof adjuvants include, but are not limited to, bacillus Calmette-Guerin(BCG), endotoxin lipopolysaccharides, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (GKLH),interleukin-2 (IL-2), granulocyte-macrophage colony-stimulating factor(GM-CSF) and cytoxan, a chemotherapeutic agent which is believe toreduce tumor-induced suppression when given in low doses.

Further examples of therapeutic agents that may be used in combinationwith MEK inhibitors include, but are not limited to, P13/Akt signalinginhibitors. Examples of P13/Akt inhibitors that may be used incombination with MEK inhibitors include, but are not limited to, humanepidermal growth factor receptor (HER2) inhibitors. Examples of HER2inhibitors include, but are not limited to, Herceptin® (Trastruzumab)and Tykerb® (Lapatinib). Tykerb®, a small molecule that can beadministered orally, inhibits the tyrosine kinase components of ErbB1and ErbB2 receptors. Stimulation of ErbB1 and ErbB2 is associated withcell proliferation and with multiple processes involved in tumorprogression, invasion, and metastasis. Overexpression of these receptorshas been reported in a variety of human tumors and is associated withpoor prognosis and reduced overall survival.

Still further examples of therapeutic agents that may be used incombination with MEK inhibitors include, but are not limited to, histonedeacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors. Examples of HDAC inhibitors that may beused in combination with MEK inhibitors include, but are not limited to,suberoylanilide hydroxamic acid (SAHA).

EXAMPLES Preparation of Mek Inhibitors

Various methods may be developed for synthesizing compounds according tothe present invention. Representative methods for synthesizing thesecompounds are provided in the Examples. It is noted, however, that thecompounds of the present invention may also be synthesized by othersynthetic routes that others may devise.

It will be readily recognized that certain compounds according to thepresent invention have atoms with linkages to other atoms that confer aparticular stereochemistry to the compound (e.g., chiral centers). It isrecognized that synthesis of compounds according to the presentinvention may result in the creation of mixtures of differentstereoisomers (i.e., enantiomers and diastereomers). Unless a particularstereochemistry is specified, recitation of a compound is intended toencompass all of the different possible stereoisomers.

Various methods for separating mixtures of different stereoisomers areknown in the art. For example, a racemic mixture of a compound may bereacted with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair ofdiastereoisomeric compounds. The diastereomers may then be separated inorder to recover the optically pure enantiomers. Dissociable complexesmay also be used to resolve enantiomers (e.g., crystallinediastereoisomeric salts). Diastereomers typically have sufficientlydistinct physical properties (e.g., melting points, boiling points,solubilities, reactivity, etc.) and can be readily separated by takingadvantage of these dissimilarities. For example, diastereomers cantypically be separated by chromatography or by separation/resolutiontechniques based upon differences in solubility. A more detaileddescription of techniques that can be used to resolve stereoisomers ofcompounds from their racemic mixture can be found in Jean Jacques AndreCollet, Samuel H. Wilen, Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, JohnWiley & Sons, Inc. (1981).

Compounds according to the present invention can also be prepared as apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt by reacting the free baseform of the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic ororganic acid. Alternatively, a pharmaceutically acceptable base additionsalt of a compound can be prepared by reacting the free acid form of thecompound with a pharmaceutically acceptable inorganic or organic base.Inorganic and organic acids and bases suitable for the preparation ofthe pharmaceutically acceptable salts of compounds are set forth in thedefinitions section of this Application. Alternatively, the salt formsof the compounds can be prepared using salts of the starting materialsor intermediates.

The free acid or free base forms of the compounds can be prepared fromthe corresponding base addition salt or acid addition salt form. Forexample, a compound in an acid addition salt form can be converted tothe corresponding free base by treating with a suitable base (e.g.,ammonium hydroxide solution, sodium hydroxide, and the like). A compoundin a base addition salt form can be converted to the corresponding freeacid by treating with a suitable acid (e.g., hydrochloric acid, etc).

The N-oxides of compounds according to the present invention can beprepared by methods known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Forexample, N-oxides can be prepared by treating an unoxidized form of thecompound with an oxidizing agent (e.g., trifluoroperacetic acid,permaleic acid, perbenzoic acid, peracetic acid,meta-chloroperoxybenzoic acid, or the like) in a suitable inert organicsolvent (e.g., a halogenated hydrocarbon such as dichloromethane) atapproximately 0° C. Alternatively, the N-oxides of the compounds can beprepared from the N-oxide of an appropriate starting material.

Compounds in an unoxidized form can be prepared from N-oxides ofcompounds by treating with a reducing agent (e.g., sulfur, sulfurdioxide, triphenyl phosphine, lithium borohydride, sodium borohydride,phosphorus trichloride, tribromide, or the like) in an suitable inertorganic solvent (e.g., acetonitrile, ethanol, aqueous dioxane, or thelike) at 0 to 80° C.

Prodrug derivatives of the compounds can be prepared by methods known tothose of ordinary skill in the art (e.g., for further details seeSaulnier et al. (1994), Bioorganic and Medicinal Chemistry Letters, Vol.4, p. 1985). For example, appropriate prodrugs can be prepared byreacting a non-derivatized compound with a suitable carbamylating agent(e.g., 1,1-acyloxyalkylcarbonochloridate, para-nitrophenyl carbonate, orthe like).

Protected derivatives of the compounds can be made by methods known tothose of ordinary skill in the art. A detailed description of thetechniques applicable to the creation of protecting groups and theirremoval can be found in T. W. Greene, Protecting Groups in OrganicSynthesis, 3^(rd) edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. 1999.

Compounds according to the present invention may be convenientlyprepared, or formed during the process of the invention, as solvates(e.g., hydrates). Hydrates of compounds of the present invention may beconveniently prepared by recrystallization from an aqueous/organicsolvent mixture, using organic solvents such as dioxin, tetrahydrofuranor methanol.

Compounds according to the present invention can also be prepared astheir individual stereoisomers by reacting a racemic mixture of thecompound with an optically active resolving agent to form a pair ofdiastereoisomeric compounds, separating the diastereomers and recoveringthe optically pure enantiomer. While resolution of enantiomers can becarried out using covalent diastereomeric derivatives of compounds,dissociable complexes are preferred (e.g., crystalline diastereoisomericsalts). Diastereomers have distinct physical properties (e.g., meltingpoints, boiling points, solubilities, reactivity, etc.) and can bereadily separated by taking advantage of these dissimilarities. Thediastereomers can be separated by chromatography or, preferably, byseparation/resolution techniques based upon differences in solubility.The optically pure enantiomer is then recovered, along with theresolving agent, by any practical means that would not result inracemization. A more detailed description of the techniques applicableto the resolution of stereoisomers of compounds from their racemicmixture can be found in Jean Jacques Andre Collet, Samuel H. Wilen,Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (1981).

As used herein the symbols and conventions used in these processes,schemes and examples are consistent with those used in the contemporaryscientific literature, for example, the Journal of the American ChemicalSociety or the Journal of Biological Chemistry. Standard single-letteror three-letter abbreviations are generally used to designate amino acidresidues, which are assumed to be in the L-configuration unlessotherwise noted. Unless otherwise noted, all starting materials wereobtained from commercial suppliers and used without furtherpurification. Specifically, the following abbreviations may be used inthe examples and throughout the specification:

μL (microliters) Ac (acetyl) atm (atmosphere) ATP (AdenosineTriphophatase) BOC (tert-butyloxycarbonyl) BOP(bis(2-oxo-3-oxazolidinyl)phosphinic chloride) BSA (Bovine SerumAlbumin) CBZ (benzyloxycarbonyl) CDI (1,1-carbonyldiimidazole) DCC(dicyclohexylcarbodiimide) DCE (dichloroethane) DCM (dichloromethane)DMAP (4-dimethylaminopyridine) DME (1,2-dimethoxyethane) DMF(N,N-dimethylformamide) DMPU (N,N′-dimethylpropyleneurea) DMSO(dimethylsulfoxide) EDCI (ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride) EDTA(Ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid) Et (ethyl) Et₂O (diethyl ether) EtOAc(ethyl acetate) FMOC (9-fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl) g (grams) h (hours)HOAc or AcOH (acetic acid) HOBT (1-hydroxybenzotriazole) HOSu(N-hydroxysuccinimide) HPLC (high pressure liquid chromatography) Hz(Hertz) i.v. (intravenous) IBCF (isobutyl chloroformate) i-PrOH(isopropanol) L (liters) M (molar) mCPBA (meta-chloroperbenzoic acid) Me(methyl) MeOH (methanol) mg (milligrams) MHz (megahertz) min (minutes)mL (milliliters) mM (millimolar) mmol (millimoles) mol (moles) MOPS(Morpholinepropanesulfonic acid) mp (melting point) NaOAc (sodiumacetate) OMe (methoxy) psi (pounds per square inch) RP (reverse phase)RT (ambient temperature) SPA (Scintillation Proximity Assay) TBAF(tetra-n-butylammonium fluoride) TBS (t-butyldimethylsilyl) tBu(tert-butyl) TEA (triethylamine) TFA (trifluoroacetic acid) TFAA(trifluoroacetic anhydride) THF (tetrahydrofuran) TIPS(triisopropylsilyl) TLC (thin layer chromatography) TMS (trimethylsilyl)TMSE (2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl) Tr (retention time)

All references to ether or Et₂O are to diethyl ether; and brine refersto a saturated aqueous solution of NaCl. Unless otherwise indicated, alltemperatures are expressed in ° C. (degrees Centigrade). All reactionsare conducted under an inert atmosphere at RT unless otherwise noted.

¹H NMR spectra were recorded on a Bruker Avance 400. Chemical shifts areexpressed in parts per million (ppm). Coupling constants are in units ofHertz (Hz). Splitting patterns describe apparent multiplicities and aredesignated as s (singlet), d (doublet), t (triplet), q (quartet), m(multiplet), br (broad).

Low-resolution mass spectra (MS) and compound purity data were acquiredon a Waters ZQ LC/MS single quadrupole system equipped with electrosprayionization (ESI) source, UV detector (220 and 254 nm), and evaporativelight scattering detector (ELSD). Thin-layer chromatography wasperformed on 0.25 mm E. Merck silica gel plates (60E-254), visualizedwith UV light, 5% ethanolic phosphomolybdic acid, Ninhydrin orp-anisaldehyde solution. Flash column chromatography was performed onsilica gel (230-400 mesh, Merck).

The starting materials and reagents used in preparing these compoundsare either available from commercial suppliers such as the AldrichChemical Company (Milwaukee, Wis.), Bachem (Torrance, Calif.), Sigma(St. Louis, Mo.), or may be prepared by methods well known to a personof ordinary skill in the art, following procedures described in suchstandard references as Fieser and Fieser's Reagents for OrganicSynthesis, vols. 1-17, John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y., 1991; Rodd'sChemistry of Carbon Compounds, vols. 1-5 and supps., Elsevier SciencePublishers, 1989; Organic Reactions, vols. 1-40, John Wiley and Sons,New York, N.Y., 1991; March J.: Advanced Organic Chemistry, 4th ed.,John Wiley and Sons, New York, N.Y.; and Larock: Comprehensive OrganicTransformations, VCH Publishers, New York, 1989.

The entire disclosures of all documents cited throughout thisapplication are incorporated herein by reference.

Synthetic Schemes for Compounds of the Present Invention

Compounds according to the present invention may be synthesizedaccording to the reaction schemes shown below. Other reaction schemescould be readily devised by those skilled in the art. It should also beappreciated that a variety of different solvents, temperatures and otherreaction conditions can be varied to optimize the yields of thereactions.

In the reactions described hereinafter it may be necessary to protectreactive functional groups, for example hydroxy, amino, imino, thio orcarboxy groups, where these are desired in the final product, to avoidtheir unwanted participation in the reactions. Conventional protectinggroups may be used in accordance with standard practice, for examplessee T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts in “Protective Groups in OrganicChemistry” John Wiley and Sons, 1991.

A general synthetic route for producing compounds of the presentinvention is shown in Scheme 1. Compound A is reacted with PO(X₁)₃,where X₁ is halo (e.g., Cl), under reflux to provide Compound B.Coupling of Compound B with an aniline using, for example, LDA or BuLiat −78-0° C., or under microwave heating conditions at 50-200° C.,provides Compound C. Compound C is then treated with phenylchloroformate and a base, such as Et₃N or pyridine, to give Compound D.Finally, displacement of the phenol group with an amine underconventional heating or microwave heating conditions both at 50-150° C.,gives compounds of the present invention (Compounds E).

In particular embodiments, the route described in connection with Scheme1 can be used to produce the compounds described in Schemes 1a and 1b.

A synthetic route for producing other compounds of the present inventionis shown in Scheme 2. Acylation of Compound C with an acylating reagentgives compounds of the present invention (Compounds F).

In particular embodiments, the route described in connection with Scheme2 can be used to produce the compounds described in Scheme 2a.

A synthetic route for producing other compounds of the present inventionis shown in Scheme 3. Acidic hydrolysis of Compound G provides CompoundH, which is then coupled with an aniline to give compounds of thepresent invention (Compounds I).

In particular embodiments, the route described in connection with Scheme3 can be used to produce the compounds described in Scheme 3a.

A synthetic route for producing other compounds of the present inventionis shown in Scheme 4. Coupling of Compound J with an aniline providesCompound K, which is then hydrolyzed to give the compound of the presentinvention (Compounds L).

In particular embodiments, the route described in connection with Scheme4 can be used to produce the compounds described in Scheme 4a.

Chiral components can be separated and purified using any of a varietyof techniques known to those skilled in the art. For example, chiralcomponents can be purified using supercritical fluid chromatography(SFC). In one particular variation, chiral analytical SFC/MS analysesare conducted using a Berger analytical SFC system (AutoChem, Newark,Del.) which consists of a Berger SFC dual pump fluid control module witha Berger FCM 1100/1200 supercritical fluid pump and FCM 1200 modifierfluid pump, a Berger TCM 2000 oven, and an Alcott 718 autosampler. Theintegrated system can be controlled by BI-SFC Chemstation softwareversion 3.4. Detection can be accomplished with a Waters ZQ 2000detector operated in positive mode with an ESI interface and a scanrange from 200-800 Da with 0.5 second per scan. Chromatographicseparations can be performed on a ChiralPak AD-H, ChiralPak AS-H,ChiralCel OD-H, or ChiralCel OJ-H column (5μ, 4.6×250 mm; ChiralTechnologies, Inc. West Chester, Pa.) with 10 to 40% methanol as themodifier and with or without ammonium acetate (10 mM). Any of a varietyof flow rates can be utilized including, for example, 1.5 or 3.5 mL/minwith an inlet pressure set at 100 bar. Additionally, a variety of sampleinjection conditions can be used including, for example, sampleinjections of either 5 or 104 in methanol at 0.1 mg/mL in concentration.

In another variation, preparative chiral separations are performed usinga Berger MultiGram II SFC purification system. For example, samples canbe loaded onto a ChiralPak AD column (21×250 mm, 10μ). In particularvariations, the flow rate for separation can be 70 mL/min, the injectionvolume up to 2 mL, and the inlet pressure set at 130 bar. Stackedinjections can be applied to increase the efficiency.

In each of the above reaction procedures or schemes, the varioussubstituents may be selected from among the various substituentsotherwise taught herein.

Descriptions of the syntheses of particular compounds according to thepresent invention based on the above reaction scheme are set forthherein.

Examples of MEK Inhibitors

The present invention is further exemplified, but not limited by, thefollowing examples that describe the synthesis of particular compoundsaccording to the invention.

Example 16-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

To an ice-cooled solution of diisopropylamine (12.0 mL, 85.8 mmol) inTHF (150 mL), n-butyllithium (1.6 M solution in hexanes, 53.6 mL, 85.8mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 min undernitrogen atmosphere. The mixture was cooled at −78° C. and was added2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline (13.6 g, 57.3 mmol) and THF (50 mL). The mixturewas stirred at −78° C. for 30 min. To the suspension, a solution of6-chloro-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H, 3H)-dione in THF/HMPA (1/1, 50mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 45 min. Dry-icebath was removed and the mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h. THF wasremoved by evaporation and residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate.Organic layer was washed four times with water, washed with brine, driedover Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Resulting dark purple slurry was suspendedin CH₂Cl₂ and insoluble solid was collected by filtration to giveExample 1 as a white solid (6.31 g, 59%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d)δ ppm 3.34 (s, 3H), 3.57 (s, 3H), 5.12 (s, 1H), 5.64 (s, 1H), 7.07 (t,J=8.21 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.58 (m, 2H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₂H₁₁FIN₃O₂, 376;found, 376.

Example 2(R)—N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To an ice-cooled solution of Example 1 (2.00 g, 5.33 mmol) in pyridine(20 mL), phenyl chloroformate (0.802 mL, 6.39 mmol) was added and themixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. Pyridine was removed by evaporationand residue was solidified by mixing with diisopropyl ether. Solid wascollected by filtration, washed with diisopropyl ether, and dried invacuo to give Compound 2A (2.46 g, 93%) as a white solid. [M+H] calc'dfor C₁₉H₁₅FIN₃O₄, 496; found, 496.

A mixture of Compound 2A (100 mg, 0.202 mmol) and (R)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine (149 mg, 1.01mmol) in THF (1.0 mL) was heated at 80° C. for 15 h. After cooling, themixture was concentrated in vacuo to give yellowish white solid. Thissolid was suspended in a mixture of DMSO (1 mL)/CH₃CN (2 mL)/H₂O (10 mL)and insoluble solid was collected by filtration to give Compound 2B as awhite solid (53.2 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 1.38 (s,3H), 1.46 (s, 3H), 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.37 (s, 3H), 3.86 (dd, J=8.34, 6.32Hz, 1H), 4.03 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 2H), 4.11 (dd, J=8.46, 6.44 Hz, 1H), 4.41(t, J=5.94 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (t, J=8.46 Hz, 1H), 7.46-7.54 (m, 2H), 12.08(s, 1H), 12.80 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₂₂FIN₄O₆, 549; found, 549.

To a suspension of Compound 2B (119 mg, 0.202 mmol) in MeOH/H₂O (10/1,2.2 mL), p-TsOH monohydrate (4 mg, 0.02 mmol) was added and the mixturewas stirred at rt. After 15 h, THF (2.0 mL) and 1 N HCl (0.4 mL) wereadded and the mixture was stirred at rt. After 9 h, THF (2.0 mL), MeOH(2.0 mL) and 1 N HCl (0.4 mL) were added and the mixture was stirred atrt. After 24 h, the mixture was neutralized with sat. NaHCO₃ aq. (1.0mL) and concentrated in vacuo. Water was added to the residue and themixture was extracted with CHCl₃. Organic layer was washed with brine,dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Example 2 was isolated by LC-MS as awhite solid. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.38 (s,3H), 3.59-3.78 (m, 2H), 3.94-4.06 (m, 3H), 6.86 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H),7.50-7.56 (m, 2H), 12.11 (s, 1H), 12.48 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₆H₁₈FIN₄O₆, 509; found, 509.

Example 36-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To a suspension of Compound 2A (100 mg, 0.202 mmol) in a mixed solventof THF (1.0 mL) and DMF (5 drops), a solution ofO-(2-(vinyloxy)ethyl)hydroxylamine (31% w/w in ethyl acetate, 269 mg,0.808 mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 50° C. for 12 h andat 80° C. for 12 h. After cooling, solvents were removed by evaporationand residue was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂. This solution was washed with sat.NaHCO₃ aq. and brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purificationthrough a silica column gave Compound 3B as a colorless gum. [M+H]calc'd for C₁₇H₁₈FIN₄O₅, 505; found, 505.

To a suspension of Compound 3B (60 mg, 0.119 mmol) in EtOH (1.6 mL), 1NHCl (0.32 mL, 0.32 mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt.After 1 h, solvents were removed by evaporation and residue wasdissolved with CH₂Cl₂. This solution was washed with sat. NaHCO₃ aq. andbrine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification using LC-MS gaveExample 3 as colorless gum (3.4 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δppm 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.72-3.76 (m, 2H), 4.00-4.05 (m, 2H),5.45 (br. s., 1H), 6.86 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (dd, J=8.08, 4.04 Hz,2H), 11.99 (s, 1H), 12.57 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₆FIN₄O₅, 479;found, 479.

Example 4N-(cyclopropylmethoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To a suspension of Compound 2A (132 mg, 0.267 mmol) andO-(cyclopropylmethyl)hydroxylamine hydrochloride (99 mg, 0.801 mmol) inTHF (1.0 mL), triethylamine (0.112 mL, 0.801 mmol) was added and themixture was heated at 50° C. for 30 min and at 80° C. for 30 min in asealed vial. To the mixture, O-(cyclopropylmethyl)hydroxylaminehydrochloride (231 mg, 1.87 mmol), triethylamine (0.261 mL, 1.87 mmol)and THF (1.0 mL) were added and the mixture was stirred at 80° C. for 1h. After concentration in vacuo, residue was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂, washedwith 1M NaHSO₄ and brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purificationthrough a silica column gave Example 4 as a white solid (45.2 mg). ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 0.29-0.35 (m, 2H), 0.58-0.65 (m, 2H),1.15-1.23 (m, 1H), 3.10 (s, 3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 3.79 (d, J=7.33 Hz, 2H),6.82 (t, J=8.46 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.54 (m, 2H), 11.95 (s, 1H), 12.93 (s,1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₇H₁₈FIN₄O₄, 489; found, 489.

Example 56-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-methoxy-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To a suspension of Compound 2A (100 mg, 0.202 mmol) andO-methylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (84 mg, 1.01 mmol) in THF (1.0 mL),triethylamine (0.140 mL, 1.00 mmol) was added and the mixture was heatedat 80° C. for 3 h in a sealed vial. After concentration in vacuo,residue was dissolved in CHCl₃, washed with 1M NaHSO₄ and brine, driedover Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification using LC-MS gave Example 5 as awhite solid (19.9 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.12 (s,3H), 3.40 (s, 3H), 3.85 (s, 3H), 6.85 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.58 (m,2H), 11.98 (s, 1H), 12.87 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₄H₁₄FIN₄O₄, 449;found, 449.

Example 66-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-hydroxy-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To a suspension of Compound 2A (50 mg, 0.101 mmol) in THF (0.5 mL), anaqueous solution of hydroxylamine (50% w/w, 0.0619 mL, 1.01 mmol) wasadded and the mixture was stirred at rt. After 1 h, water was added andthe mixture was extracted twice with CH₂Cl₂. Combined organic layer waswashed with water and brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated.Purification using LC-MS gave Example 6 as a white solid (15.8 mg). ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.11 (s, 3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 6.83 (t,J=8.21 Hz, 1H), 7.48-7.56 (m, 2H), 11.87 (br. s., 1H), 12.26 (br. s.,1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₃H₁₂FIN₄O₄, 435; found, 435.

Example 7 Methyl2-(6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamido)acetate

The title compound was synthesized from glycine methyl esterhydrochloride following a similar procedure described in the synthesisof Example 5. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.40(s, 3H), 3.77 (s, 3H), 4.13 (d, J=5.56 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (t, J=8.21 Hz, 1H),7.44-7.55 (m, 2H), 10.36 (br. s., 1H), 13.09 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₆H₁₆FIN₄O₅, 491; found, 491.

Example 82-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamido)aceticacid

To a solution of Example 7 (56 mg, 0.114 mmol) in THF/MeOH (1/1, 2.0mL), 1 N NaOH aq. (1.0 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at rtfor 3 h. 1 M NaHSO₄ aq. was added and the mixture was extracted twicewith CHCl₃. Combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried overNa₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification using LC-MS gave Example 8 as awhite solid (13.6 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.94 (s, 3H),3.23 (s, 3H), 3.99 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 2H), 7.15 (t, J=8.59 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (s,1H), 7.80 (dd, J=10.11, 1.77 Hz, 1H), 10.14 (br. s., 1H), 13.01 (br. s.,1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₄FIN₄O₅, 477; found, 477.

Example 96-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carbohydrazide

The title compound was synthesized from hydrazine following a similarprocedure described in the synthesis of Example 6. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.11 (s, 3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 4.00 (br. s., 2H), 6.81(t, J=8.21 Hz, 1H), 7.45-7.55 (m, 2H), 10.65 (br. s., 1H), 12.93 (s,1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₃H₁₃FIN₅O₃, 434; found, 434.

Example 105-Acetyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

The title compound was synthesized from acetic anhydride and Example 1following a similar procedure described in the synthesis of Compound 2A.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 2.71 (s, 3H), 3.07 (s, 3H), 3.38(s, 3H), 6.86 (t, J=8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.50-7.55 (m, 2H), 13.40 (s, 1H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₄H₁₃FIN₃O₃, 418; found, 418.

Example 116-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(furan-2-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

To a suspension of Example 1 (100 mg, 0.267 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (1.0 mL),triethylamine (0.0446 mL, 0.320 mmol) and 2-furoyl chloride (0.0315 mL,0.320 mmol) were added. Resulting solution was stirred at rt for 1 h.Reaction was quenched with sat. NaHCO₃ aq. and aqueous layer wasextracted with CH₂Cl₂. Combined organic layer was washed with brine,dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification through a silica columngave Example 11 as a pale yellow solid (73.7 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.32 (s, 3H), 3.53 (s, 3H), 5.44 (d, J=1.52 Hz, 1H),6.59-6.69 (m, 2H), 7.33-7.45 (m, 3H), 7.72 (d, J=1.01 Hz, 1H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₇H₁₃FIN₃O₄, 470; found, 470.

Example 126-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-methoxyacetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

To a suspension of Example 1 (100 mg, 0.267 mmol) in CH₂Cl₂ (1.0 mL),triethylamine (0.0446 mL, 0.320 mmol) and 2-methoxyacetyl chloride(0.0293 mL, 0.320 mmol) were added and resulting solution was stirred atrt. After 1 h, N,N-dimethylaminopyridine (6.5 mg, 0.053 mmol) was addedand the mixture was stirred at rt for 1 h. Reaction was quenched with 1M NaHSO₄ aq. and aqueous layer was extracted with CH₂Cl₂. Combinedorganic layer was washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄ and evaporated.Purification through a silica column gave Example 12 as a white solid(105 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.08 (s, 3H), 3.37 (s,3H), 3.50 (s, 3H), 4.81 (s, 2H), 6.88 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.60 (m,2H), 13.30 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₅FIN₃O₄, 448; found, 448.

Example 136-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-(2-methoxyethoxy)acetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

The title compound was synthesized from 2-(2-methoxyethoxy)acetylchloride following a similar procedure described in the synthesis ofExample 12. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.07 (s, 3H), 3.36 (s,3H), 3.41 (s, 3H), 3.63 (dd, J=5.56, 3.54 Hz, 2H), 3.72-3.78 (m, 2H),4.91 (s, 2H), 6.87 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.49-7.56 (m, 2H), 13.27 (s, 1H).[M+H] calc'd for C₁₇H₁₉FIN₃O₅, 492; found, 492.

Example 142-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl)-2-oxoethylacetate

The title compound was synthesized from 2-chloro-2-oxoethyl acetatefollowing a similar procedure described in the synthesis of Example 12.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 2.22 (s, 3H), 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.39(s, 3H), 5.40 (s, 2H), 6.89 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.50-7.60 (m, 2H), 13.06(s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₅FIN₃O₅, 476; found, 476.

Example 156-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(2-hydroxyacetyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

To a suspension of Example 14 (95 mg, 0.200 mmol) in MeOH/THF/H₂O(5/5/1, 4.4 mL), K₂CO₃ (276 mg, 2.00 mmol) was added and the mixture wasstirred at rt. After 1 h, MeOH (2.0 mL), THF (2.0 mL) and H₂O (0.4 mL)were added and the mixture was stirred at rt for further 5 h. Afteracidification with 1 N HCl aq., the mixture was diluted with MeOH andwater and concentrated in vacuo. Residue was diluted with water andextracted with CH₂Cl₂. Organic layer was washed with brine, dried overNa₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification using LC-MS gave Example 15 ascolorless amorphous solid (14 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm3.09 (s, 3H), 3.37 (s, 3H), 4.88 (s, 2H), 6.91 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H),7.54-7.59 (m, 2H), 12.95 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₄H₁₃FIN₃O₄, 434;found, 434.

Example 166-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Compound 16A (120 mg, 0.60 mmol) was suspended in concentrated sulfuricacid (1 ml). The mixture was heated at 80° C. for 2 hours, cooled toroom temperature, and then poured onto ice. The resulting mixture waspurified with HPLC to give Compound 16B as a white solid (70 mg).

To an ice-cooled solution of diisopropylamine (0.105 mL, 0.750 mmol) inTHF (1.5 mL), n-butyllithium (1.6 M solution in hexanes, 0.469 mL, 0.750mmol) was added and the mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 15 min undernitrogen atmosphere. The mixture was cooled to −78° C. and a solution of2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline (88.9 mg, 0.375 mmol) in THF (0.5 mL) was added.The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 15 min. To the mixture, asolution of Compound 16B (16.3 mg, 0.075 mmol) in HMPA (0.5 mL) wasadded and the mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 30 min. Dry-ice bathwas removed and the mixture was stirred at rt for 14 h. The mixture wascooled on ice, mixed with 1 M NaHSO₄ aq., and extracted with ethylacetate. Organic layer was washed with water three times, dried overNa₂SO₄ and evaporated. Purification through a silica column gave Example16 as a white solid (18 mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.09(s, 3H), 3.39 (s, 3H), 5.54 (br. s., 1H), 6.84 (t, J=8.46 Hz, 1H),7.46-7.55 (m, 2H), 9.59 (br. s., 1H), 13.25 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₃H₁₂FIN₄O₃, 419; found, 419.

Example 176-(4-Iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The title compound was synthesized from 4-iodo-2-methylaniline followinga similar procedure described in the synthesis of Example 16. ¹H NMR(400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 2.31 (s, 3H), 2.99 (s, 3H), 3.39 (s, 3H),5.50 (br. s., 1H), 6.60 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (dd, J=8.08, 1.77 Hz,1H), 7.62 (d, J=1.77 Hz, 1H), 9.60 (br. s., 1H), 13.04 (br. s., 1H).[M+H] calc'd for C₁₄H₁₅IN₄O₃, 415; found, 415.

Example 186-(4-Bromo-2-chlorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The title compound was synthesized from 4-bromo-2-chloroanilinefollowing a similar procedure described in the synthesis of Example 16.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.04 (s, 3H), 3.40 (s, 3H), 5.53(br. s., 1H), 6.88 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (dd, J=8.59, 2.27 Hz, 1H),7.64 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 1H), 9.58 (br. s., 1H), 13.27 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'dfor C₁₃H₁₂BrClN₄O₃, 389.0, 387.0; found, 389.0, 387.0.

Example 196-(4-Bromo-2-fluorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The title compound was synthesized from 4-bromo-2-fluoroanilinefollowing a similar procedure described in the synthesis of Example 16.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 3.09 (s, 3H), 3.39 (s, 3H), 5.53(br. s., 1H), 6.99 (t, J=8.34 Hz, 1H), 7.28-7.37 (m, 2H), 9.60 (br. s.,1H), 13.25 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₃H₁₂BrFN₄O₃, 371, 373; found,371, 373.

Example 20 Ethyl6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylateExample 21 Ethyl6-(2-fluorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

A suspension of ethyl1,3-dimethyl-2,4,6-trioxohexahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate (190 mg,0.833 mmol) in POCl₃ (2.0 mL) was heated at 100° C. After 3 h, excessivePOCl₃ was removed by evaporation and residue was neutralized with sat.NaHCO₃ aq. with cooling on ice. The mixture was extracted twice withCHCl₃ and combined organic layer was washed with brine, dried overNa₂SO₄ and evaporated to afford Compound 20B as a yellow solid (132 mg).[M+H] calc'd for C₉H₁₁ClN₂O₄, 247, 249; found, 247, 249.

A mixture of Compound 20B (122 mg, 0.495 mmol) and2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline (234 mg, 0.989 mmol) in EtOH (2.0 mL) was heatedat 150° C. for 1 h under microwave irradiation. After cooling, themixture was diluted with CH₂Cl₂, charged onto a silica column and elutedwith CH₂Cl₂ to obtain crude product. Purification using LC-MS gaveExample 21 (26 mg) and a mixture of fluoro-4-iodoaniline and Example 20.Further purification of the mixture through a silica column gave Example20 (38 mg). Example 20: ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 1.40 (t,J=7.20 Hz, 3H), 3.11 (s, 3H), 3.37 (s, 3H), 4.36 (q, J=7.16 Hz, 2H),6.77 (t, J=8.21 Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.56 (m, 2H), 11.04 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'dfor C₁₅H₁₅FIN₃O₄, 448; found, 448. Example 21: ¹H NMR (400 MHz,CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 1.40 (t, J=7.07 Hz, 3H), 3.10 (s, 3H), 3.39 (s, 3H),4.36 (q, J=7.07 Hz, 2H), 7.07 (t, J=7.96 Hz, 1H), 7.13-7.20 (m, 2H),7.21-7.26 (m, 1H), 11.17 (s, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₆FN₃O₄, 322;found, 322.

Example 22 Ethyl6-(4-bromo-2-chlorophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

The title compound was synthesized from 4-bromo-2-chloroanilinefollowing a similar procedure described in the synthesis of Example 20.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm 1.40 (t, J=7.07 Hz, 3H), 3.07 (s,3H), 3.38 (s, 3H), 4.37 (q, J=7.07 Hz, 2H), 6.81 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H),7.39 (dd, J=8.59, 2.27 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J=2.27 Hz, 1H), 10.97 (s, 1H).[M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₅BrClN₃O₄, 418, 416; found, 418, 416.

Example 23 Phenyl6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

6-Chloro-1,3-dimethyluracil (30.0 g, 0.172 mol) and2-chloro-4-iodoaniline (44.4 g, 0.175 mol) were dissolved in THF (600mL) and cooled to 0° C. under nitrogen. LiHMDS (1.0 M in THF, 360 mL,0.360 mol) was added over 20 min and stirred for an additional 30 min at0-5° C. Saturated ammonium chloride (400 mL) was added and the layerswere separated. The organic layer was washed with brine (300 mL), driedover magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to give the crudeproduct (67.73 g). The crude product was suspended in MTBE (200 mL) andstirred for 10 min. The solid was collected by filtration and washedwith MTBE (2×50 mL) to afford compound 23A (61.1 g, 91%). ¹H NMR (400MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 3.33 (s, 3H) 3.57 (s, 3H) 5.08 (s, 1H) 6.09 (br.s. 1H)7.09 (d, J=8.4 Hz, 1H) 7.62 (dd, J=8.4, 1.9 Hz, 1H) 7.82 (d, J=1.9 Hz,1H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₂H₁₁ClIN₃O₂, 392; found, 392.

Compound 23A (2 g, 5.1 mmol, 1 eq), triethylamine (1.14 ml, 8.2 mmol,1.6 eq) and 4-dimethylaminopyridine (10 mg, cat) were mixed in THF (10ml) at 0° C. Phenyl Chloroformate (771 μl, 6.1 mmol, 1.2 eq) was addeddrop wise then the reaction mixture stirred for 1 hour whilst allowingto warm up to RT. The reaction was complete by LCMS. The solid wasfiltered off and the filtrate diluted with DCM and washed with waterthen brine. After drying over magnesium sulfate the solvent was removedin vacuo to leave a pale yellow solid which was then purified by silicagel chromatography to give the title compound as a white solid (2.6 g,5.1 mmol, 100%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 3.21 (s, 3H) 3.25 (s,3H) 6.80 (d, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 7.09-7.16 (m, 1H) 7.22 (t, J=6.95 Hz, 1H)7.31-7.41 (m, 1H) 7.42-7.51 (m, 1H) 7.70 (d, J=8.34 Hz, 1H) 7.91 (s, 1H)9.47 (s, 1H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₁₅ClIN₃O₄, 512; found, 512.

Example 24N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Phenyl6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate(Example 23; 100 mg, 0.195 mmol, 1 eq) andO-(2-tert-butoxyethyl)hydroxylamine (See, WO05/110410; 260 mg, 1.95mmol, 10 eq) were mixed in anhydrous THF (3 ml) and heated at 100° C.for 50 minutes in a microwave reactor. The protected product Example 24was isolated by HPLC. [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₂₄Cl₁N₄O₅, 551; found, 551.

Example 256-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Addition of 3 ml of TFA to Example 24 caused the compound to de-protectwithin 5 minutes. The final product was isolated by HPLC to give Example25 (26 mg, 27%) as a white solid. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ ppm3.05 (s, 4H) 3.39 (s, 4H) 3.71-3.78 (m, 2H) 4.00-4.08 (m, 2H) 6.75 (d,J=8.08 Hz, 1H) 7.60 (dd, J=8.34, 2.02 Hz, 1H) 7.84 (d, J=2.02 Hz, 1H)[M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₆Cl₁N₄O₅, 495; found, 495.

Example 26(R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Phenyl6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate(Example 23, 300 mg, 0.588 mmol, 1 eq) and(R)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine (260 mg,1.826 mmol, 3 eq) were mixed in anhydrous THF (1.5 ml). The mixture wassubjected to microwave irradiation at 100° C. for 50 minutes. Theintended product was isolated by HPLC purification to give 140 mg ofwhite solid (42%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 1.38 (s, 3H) 1.46 (s,3H) 3.04 (s, 3H) 3.38 (s, 3H) 3.85-3.8758 (m, J=8 Hz, 1H) 4.03-4.05 (d,J=8 Hz, 2H) 4.10-4.11 (t, J=4 Hz, 1H) 6.70-6.72 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H)7.56-7.58 (d, J=8 Hz, 1H) 7.82 (s, 1H) 12.07 (s, 1H) 12.79 (s, 1H) [M+H]calc'd for C₁₉H₂₂Cl₁N₄O₆, 565; found, 565.

Example 27(R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

(R)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide(Example 26, 140 mg, 0.24 mmol, 1 eq) was dissolved in 3 ml of MeOH and3 ml of THF then p-toluenesulfonic acid (24 mg, 0.5 eq) was added. Afterstirring at RT for 6 hours the reaction was complete. Evaporation invacuo, followed by HPLC purification gave the title compound as a whitesolid. (31 mg, 24%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ ppm 2.89 (s, 3H) 3.21(s, 3H) 3.28-3.40 (m, 2H) 3.65-3.74 (m, 2H) 3.93 (dd, J=14.15, 6.82 Hz,1H) 4.61 (t, J=5.68 Hz, 1H) 4.99 (d, J=4.04 Hz, 1H) 7.14 (d, J=8.34 Hz,1H) 7.70 (dd, J=8.34, 1.77 Hz, 1H) 7.98 (d, J=1.77 Hz, 1H) 12.03 (s, 1H)12.50 (s, 1H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₈ClI₄O₆, 525; found, 525.

Example 28N-(1,3-dihydroxypropan-2-yloxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Phenyl6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate(compound 2A, 100 mg, 0.2 mmol, 1 eq) andO-(2-phenyl-1,3-dioxan-5-yl)hydroxylamine (79 mg, 0.404 mmol, 2 eq)(see, Vonhoff et al., Hely. Chim. Acta, 81(9), 1998; 1710-1725; EuropeanPatent Application No. EP1666485) were mixed in THF and subjected tomicrowave irradiation at 100° C. for 45 minutes. The reaction wascomplete by LCMS. Upon cooling, the intended product precipitated as atan solid. 62 mg (51%). This solid was then dissolved in methanol (2 ml)and THF (2 ml) with ethylene glycol (100 μl). p-Toluenesulfonic acid (18mg, 1 eq) was added and the mixture heated at 50° C. for 30 minutes.Purification by HPLC chromatography afforded the title compound as awhite solid. 28 mg (53%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 2.96 (s, 3H)3.22 (s, 3H) 3.42-3.58 (m, 4H) 4.00-4.08 (m, J=1.67, 0.78, 0.78, 0.78,0.78 Hz, 2H) 4.75 (t, J=5.94 Hz, 2H) 5.76 (s, 1H) 7.53-7.62 (m, 1H) 7.80(dd, J=9.73, 1.39 Hz, 1H) 11.99 (s, 1H) 12.23 (s, 1H) [M+H] calc'd forC₁₆H₁₈FIN₄O₆, 509; found, 509.

Example 296-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(3-hydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

O-(3-tent-Butoxy-propyl)-hydroxylamine (29A): Diisopropylazodicarboxylate (13.4 mL, 68 mmol) was added dropwise at 0° C. to astirred suspension of 3-tent-butoxy-propan-1-ol (9.0 g, 68 mmol),triphenylphosphine (17.8 g, 68 mmol), and N-hydroxyphthalimide (11.1 g,68 mmol) in THF (150 mL), and the reaction stirred for 16 h at roomtemperature. The solution was concentrated in vacuo and purified bysilica gel chromatography (20% Et₂O/hexanes) to give 15.5 g (82%) of2-(3-tert-Butoxy-propoxy)-isoindole-1,3-dione as a faintly yellow solid.¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃): δ 7.72-7.84 (m, 4H), 4.30 (t, 2H, J=4.8 Hz),3.58 (t, 2H, J=4.8 Hz), 1.94-2.00 (m, 2H), 1.20 (s, 9H). MS (ES) [m+H]calc'd for C₁₅H₁₉NO₄, 278. found 278.

Hydrazine hydrate (1.36 mL, 43.3 mmol) was added to a solution of2-(3-tert-Butoxy-propoxy)-isoindole-1,3-dione (6.0 g, 21.7 mmol) inCH₂Cl₂ (50 mL) with MeOH (5 mL), and the reaction stirred 1 h at roomtemperature. The precipitate was removed by filtration, and the filtratewas purified by silica gel chromatography (6% MeOH/CH₂Cl₂) to give 2.4 g(75%) of compound 29A as a clear oil. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃): δ 4.94(br s, 2H), 3.71 (t, 2H, J=6.4 Hz), 3.38 (t, 2H, J=6.4 Hz), 1.70-1.79(m, 2H), 1.15 (s, 9H).

6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(3-hydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide:A mixture of Example 2A (100 mg, 0.2 mmol) and3-tert-butoxypropan-1-amine (29A, 148 mg, 1 mmol) in dioxane (2 ml) washeated with microwave for 1 hr. The mixture was cooled to RT andpurified with HPLC to give 29B as a white solid, which was treated withTFA (1 ml) for 10 minutes). The volatiles were evaporated, and theresidue purified with HPLC to give the title compound (Example 29, 5.1mg). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD) δ ppm 1.87 (quin, J=6.25 Hz, 3H) 3.09 (s,3H) 3.70 (t, J=6.19 Hz, 2H) 4.02 (t, J=6.32 Hz, 3H) 7.54-7.61 (m, 1H)7.66 (dd, J=10.11, 1.77 Hz, 1H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H_(B)FIN₄O₅, 493;found, 493.

Example 306-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-5-(5-methylisoxazole-3-carbonyl)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

The title compound was synthesized following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of compound 2A by reaction of Example 1 and5-methylisoxazole-3-carbonyl chloride. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm2.42 (s, 2H) 3.13 (s, 2H) 3.19 (s, 2H) 6.13-6.29 (m, 1H) 7.08 (t, J=8.59Hz, 1H) 7.47 (dd, J=8.46, 1.89 Hz, 1H) 7.68 (dd, J=9.98, 1.89 Hz, 1H)10.47 (s, 1H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₇H₁₄FIN₄O₄, 485; found, 485.

Example 312-(6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidin-5-yl)-2-oxoaceticacid

The title compound was synthesized following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of compound 2A from reaction of Example 1with methyl 2-chloro-2-oxoacetate (hydrolysis of the crude upon columnchromatography afforded Example 31). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ ppm2.95 (s, 3H) 3.17 (s, 3H) 7.28 (s, 1H) 7.61 (m, 1H) 7.84 (m, 1H) [M+H]calc'd for C₁₄H₁₁FIN₃O₅, 448; found, 448.

Example 326-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(4-hydroxyisoxazolidine-2-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

The title compound was synthesized by treatment of Example 2A withisoxazolidin-4-ol following a similar procedure described in thesynthesis of Example 5.

¹H NMR (400 MHz, MeOD) δ ppm 3.19 (s, 3H) 3.37 (s, 3H) 3.50-3.90 (m, 4H)4.56 (m, 1H) 6.82-6.86 (m, 1H) 7.37-7.44 (m, 2H) [M+H] calc'd forC₁₆H₁₆FIN₄O₅, 491; found, 491

Example 336-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-N-(2-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The title compound was synthesized by treatment of Example 2A with2-(pyrrolidin-1-yl)ethanamine following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 5. [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₂₃FIN₅O₃, 516; found,516

Example 34(S)—N-(3,4-Dihydroxybutoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 34 was synthesized by treatment of Example 2A with(S)—O-(2-(2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)ethyl)hydroxylamine andhydrolysis of the resulting material following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of Example 2. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ7.7 (dd, J=8.0, 4.0 Hz, 1H) 7.67 (dd, J=8.0, 4.0 Hz, 1H) 7.04 (t, J=8.0Hz, 1H) 4.02 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H) 3.69 (m, 4H) 3.35 (s, 3H) 3.12 (s, 3H)2.06 (m, 1H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₇H₂₀FIN₄O₆, 523; found, 523.

Example 35N-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-6-(4-iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 35 was synthesized following similar procedures described in thesynthesis of Example 25 starting from 4-iodo-2-methylaniline instead of2-chloro-4-iodoaniline. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.73 (d, J=8.0,1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 6.80 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 4.00 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H)3.76 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H) 3.35 (s, 3H) 3.00 (s, 3H) 2.36 (s, 3H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₆H₁₉IN₄O₅, 475; found, 475.

Example 36(R)-6-(2,3-Difluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 36 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 2 starting from 2,3-difluoro-4-iodoanilineinstead of 2-chloro-4-iodoaniline. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.64(m, 1H) 6.90 (m, 1H) 4.04 (m, 1H) 3.91 (m, 2H) 3.59 (m, 2H) 3.36 (s, 3H)3.15 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₇F₂₁N₄O₆, 527; found, 527.

Example 37(S)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 37 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 2 by treatment of compound 2A with(S)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine (See, Baileyet al., J. Med. Chem., 34, 1991, 51-65), followed by acid hydrolysis ofthe resulting material. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.46 (m, 2H) 6.79 (t,J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 3.89 (m, 3H) 3.66 (m, 1H) 3.55 (m, 1H) 3.31 (s, 3H) 3.02(s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₈FIN₄O₆, 509; found, 509.

Example 38(R)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(4-iodo-2-methylphenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 38 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 2 starting from 4-iodo-2-methylaniline insteadof 2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.68 (m, 1H)7.54 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 6.78 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 4.01 (m, 1H) 3.86 (m, 2H)3.55 (m, 2H) 3.30 (s, 3H) 2.95 (s, 3H) 2.31 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₇H₂₁IN₄O₆, 505; found, 505.

Example 39(S)-6-(2-chloro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 39 was synthesized following similar procedures described in thesynthesis of Example 26 and Example 27 by using(S)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine (See, Baileyet al., J. Med. Chem., 34, 1991, 51-65) instead of (R)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine). ¹H NMR (400MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 7.99 (s, 1H) 7.69 (d, J=8.3 Hz, 1H) 7.15 (d, J=8.3 Hz,1H) 3.93 (m, 1H) 3.69 (m, 2H) 3.40 (m, 2H) 3.21 (s, 3H) 2.89 (s, 3H).[M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₈ClIN₄O₆, 525; found, 525.

Example 40(R)-6-(2,5-Difluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2,3-dihydroxypropoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 40 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 2 starting from 2,5-difluoro-4-iodoanilineinstead of 2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.73 (m,1H) 7.15 (m, 1H) 4.44 (m, 1H) 3.99 (m, 3H) 3.56 (m, 1H) 3.32 (s, 3H)3.13 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₇F₂₁N₄O₆, 527; found, 527.

Example 416-(3-Ethyl-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 41 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 25 starting from 3-ethyl-4-iodoaniline insteadof 2-chloro-4-iodoaniline. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.86 (d,J=8.08, 1H) 7.11 (s, 1H) 6.76 (d, J=8.08 Hz, 1H) 4.01 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H)3.75 (d, J=4.0 Hz, 2H) 3.30 (s, 3H) 3.04 (s, 3H) 2.71 (q, J=8.0 Hz, 2H)1.20 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₇H₂₁IN₄O₅, 489; found, 489.

Example 42N-(2-Aminoethyl)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 42 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 5 by reaction of compound 2A andethane-1,2-diamine. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.67 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H)7.62 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.01 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 3.63 (t, J=4.0 Hz, 2H)3.27 (s, 3H) 3.15 (t, J=4.0 Hz, 2H) 3.11 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₅H₁₇FIN₅O₃, 462; found, 462.

Example 436-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-5-(piperazine-1-carbonyl)pyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

Example 43 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 5 by reaction of compound 2A and piperazine. ¹HNMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.61 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.56 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H)6.99 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 3.93 (m, 1H) 3.77 (m, 1H) 3.51 (s, 3H) 3.25 (s,3H) 3.17 (m, 4H) 2.98 (m, 1H) 2.52 (m, 1H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₇H₁₉FIN₅O₃, 488; found, 488.

Example 446-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-5-(4-(2-hydroxyethyl)piperazine-1-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione

Example 44 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 5 by reaction of compound 2A and2-(piperazin-1-yl)ethanol. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.55 (m, 2H) 6.95(t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 4.17 (br, 1H) 3.86 (br, 3H) 3.54 (br, 5H) 3.33 (br,1H) 3.28 (br, 5H) 3.10 (br, 2H) 2.37 (br, 1H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₉H₂₃FIN₅O₄, 532; found, 532.

Example 456-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N′,N′,1,3-tetramethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carbohydrazide

Example 45 was synthesized following a similar procedure described inthe synthesis of Example 5 by reaction of compound 2A and1,1-dimethylhydrazine. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.66 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H)7.58 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 6.99 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 3.33 (s, 3H) 3.08 (s, 3H)2.60 (s, 6H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₇FIN₅O₃, 462; found, 462.

Example 46 Phenyl3-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

6-Chloro-3-ethyl-1-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione:6-Chloro-3-ethylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (compound 46A; 1.5 g, 8.62mmol) was dissolved in 10 ml of DMF. CH₃I (4 ml 2M solution, 8 mmol) andK₂CO₃ were added to the solution. The mixture was stirred at roomtemperature overnight. DMF was removed with a rotavap. 0.24 g (14.8%) ofcompound 46B was obtained by HPLC purification. [M+H] calc'd forC₇H₉ClN₂O₂, 189; found, 189.

3-Ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione:A solution of compound 46B (0.24 g, 1.27 mmol) and2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline (0.3 g, 1.27 mmol) in 20 ml of anhydrous THF wascooled to −78° C., followed by slow addition of LDA (2.12 ml, 3.8 mmol).The reaction was kept at −78° C. for 1 hour before it was warmed up toroom temperature and was stirred overnight. 0.4 g (80%) of compound 46Cwas obtained by silica gel chromatography (95% CH₂Cl₂/methanol). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₃H₁₃FIN₃O₂, 390; found, 390.

Phenyl3-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate:To a mixture of compound 46C (0.4 g, 1.03 mmol) in 2 ml of pyridine wasadded ClCOOPh (190 ul) slowly. The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 1 h, and then purified by HPLC to give 55 mg (10.5%) ofExample 46. [M+H] calc'd for C₂₀H₁₇FIN₃O₄, 510; found, 510.

Example 47N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-3-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

A mixture of Example 46 (55 mg, 0.108 mmol) andO-(2-tert-butoxyethyl)hydroxylamine (See, WO05/110410; 72 mg, 0.54 mmol)in 1 ml of THF was microwave heated at 100° C. for 45 minutes. Example47 was obtained by HPLC purification. [M+H] calc'd for C₂₀H₂₆FIN₄O₅,549; found, 549.

Example 483-Ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-1-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 47 was dissolved in 1 ml of TFA. The reaction was complete at RTin 20 minutes. 2.6 mg (4.9% for two steps) of Example 48 was obtained byHPLC separation. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.66 (dd, J=9.84, 2.0Hz, 1H) 7.59 (dd, J=9.84, 2.0 Hz, 1H) 7.05 (t, J=8.6 Hz, 1H) 4.02 (m,4H) 3.76 (q, J=7.08 Hz, 2H) 3.11 (s, 3H) 1.24 (t, J=7.08 Hz, 3H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₆H₁₈FIN₄O₅, 493; found, 493.

Example 49 Phenyl1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

6-chloro-1-ethyl-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione: To a mixture of6-chloro-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (compound 49A; 5 g, 31.3mmol) in 100 ml DMF was added CH₃CH₂Br (10 g, 92.6 mmol) and K₂CO₃ (10g, 72.9 mmol). The mixture was heated at 120° C. for 1 hour. DMF wasremoved and compound 49B was crystallized from ethanol. 2.9 g (50%) ofcompound 49B was obtained. [M+H] calc'd for C₇H₉ClN₂O₂, 189; found, 189.

1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione:The solution of compound 49B (1 g, 5.32 mmol) and 2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline(1.26 g, 5.32 mmol) in 50 ml of anhydrous THF was cooled to −78° C.,followed by slow addition of LDA (8.86 ml, 16 mmol). The reaction waskept at −78° C. for 1 hour, and was then warmed up to room temperatureand stirred overnight. Compound 49C (150 mg, 7.2%) was obtained bysilica gel chromatography (95% CH₂Cl₂/methanol). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₃H₁₃FIN₃O₂, 390; found, 390.

Phenyl1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate:To a solution of compound 49C (50 mg, 0.128 mmol) in 1 ml of pyridinewas added ClCOOPh (21 mg) slowly. The reaction was stirred at roomtemperature for 1 h. THF was removed and ether was added to precipitatethe product. 15 mg (23%) of Example 49 was obtained. [M+H] calc'd forC₂₀H₁₇FIN₃O₄, 510; found, 510.

Example 50N-(2-tert-butoxyethoxy)-1-ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The mixture of Example 49 (15 mg, 0.029 mmol),O-(2-tert-butoxyethyl)hydroxylamine (See, WO05/110410; 20 mg, 0.15 mmol)in 0.3 ml of THF was microwave heated at 100° C. for 2 h. 10 mg (62.5%)of Example 50 was obtained by HPLC purification of the reaction mixture.[M+H] calc'd for C₂₀H₂₆FIN₄O₅, 549; found, 549.

Example 511-Ethyl-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethoxy)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 50 (10 mg, 0.0182 mmol) was treated with 1 ml of TFA. Thereaction was stirred at room temperature for 30 minutes. The volatileswere removed and the crude was purified by HPLC purification to giveExample 51 (1.5 mg, 16.7%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ 7.54 (m, 2H) 6.91(t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 4.06 (q, J=8.0 Hz, 2H) 3.80 (m, 4H) 3.40 (s, 3H) 1.06(t, J=8.0 Hz, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₈FIN₄O₅, 493; found, 493.

Example 52 Phenyl6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate

6-Chloro-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione: To asolution of 6-chloro-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione (compound 49A;2 g, 12.5 mmol) in 15 ml of DMF was added CH₂FBr (4.2 g, 37.5 mmol) andK₂CO₃ (1 g, 7.29 mmol). The mixture was microwave heated at 120° C. for30 minutes. DMF was removed and the residue purified by silica gelchromatography (95% CH₂Cl₂/methanol) to give compound 52B (0.6 g, 25%).¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 6.17 (d, J=52 Hz, 2H) 6.11 (s, 1H) 3.29(s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₆H₆ClFN₂O₂, 193; found, 193.

6-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methylpyrimidine-2,4(1H,3H)-dione:Compound 52B (0.27 g, 1.41 mmol) and 2-fluoro-4-iodoaniline (0.358 g,1.40 mmol) was mixed in 4 ml anhydrous THF. The mixture was cooled to−78° C. LDA (2.5 ml, 4.53 mmol) solution was then added dropwise. Thereaction was kept at −78° C. for 30 minutes, then warmed up to roomtemperature and stirred for 2 h. Compound 52C (80 mg, 14.5%) wasobtained by HPLC purification. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.69 (d,J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.64 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.13 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 6.21 (d,J=52 Hz, 2H) 3.25 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₂H₁₀F₂₁N₃O₂, 393; found,393.

Phenyl6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxylate:Compound 52C (37 mg, 0.094 mmol) in THF (1 ml) was added catalyticamount of DMAP. The solution was cooled to 0° C., and 1 drop of TEA wasthen added. ClCOOPh (17 mg) in THF was then introduced to the reactionmixture drop by drop. The reaction was kept at 0° C. for 1 h, thenwarmed up to room temperature and stirred overnight. THF was removed andthe crude was dissolved in CH₂Cl₂. The organic phase was washed withwater and brine, dried by MgSO₄. The solvents were removed to give 40 mg(83%) of compound 52. [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₁₄F₂₁N₃O₄, 514; found, 514.

Example 53(R)—N-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

Example 52 (48 mg, 0.094 mmol) and (R)—O-((2,2-dimethyl-1,3-dioxolan-4-yl)methyl)hydroxylamine (68 mg, 0.466mmol) were mixed in THF (2 ml). The mixture was microwave heated at 100°C. for 1 h. After cooling the reaction mixture to room temperature,Example 53 was obtained. [M+H] calc'd for C₁₉H₂₁F₂IN₄O₆, 567; found,567.

Example 54(R)—N-(2,3-Dihydroxypropoxy)-6-(2-fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-1-(fluoromethyl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

To Example 53, was added 1 ml of 1N HCl. The mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 2 h, before it was purified by HPLC to give Example 54(7.5 mg, 15.2%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz, Methanol-d₄) δ 7.60 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H)7.56 (d, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.15 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 5.63 (d, J=52 Hz, 2H) 3.99(m, 1H) 3.86 (m, 2H) 3.57 (m, 2H) 3.32 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd forC₁₆H₁₇F₂₁N₄O₆, 527; found, 527.

Example 556-(2-Fluoro-4-iodophenylamino)-N-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydropyrimidine-5-carboxamide

The title compound was synthesized following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of Example 5 by reaction of compound 2A and2-aminoethanol. ¹H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl₃) δ ppm 3.10 (s, 3H) 3.39 (s, 3H)3.53-3.57 (m, 2H) 3.78-3.81 (m, 2H) 6.81 (t, J=8.0 Hz, 1H) 7.47-7.52 (m,2H) [M+H] calc'd for C₁₅H₁₆FIN₄O₄, 463; found, 463.

Example 566-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidine-5-carboxylicacid ((R)-2,4-dihydroxy-butoxy)-amide

The title compound was synthesized following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of Example 2 by treatment of compound 2A withO—((R)-2-Phenyl-[1,3]dioxan-4-ylmethyl)-hydroxylamine, followed by acidhydrolysis of the resulting material (total yield 60%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz,DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 12.32 (s, 1H) 11.97 (s, 1H) 7.80 (dd, J=10.11, 1.77 Hz,1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.15 (t, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 4.90 (d, J=4.29 Hz,1H) 4.38 (t, J=5.05 Hz, 1H) 3.71-3.90 (m, 2H) 3.56-3.67 (m, 1H)3.44-3.53 (m, 2H) 3.21 (s, 3H) 2.96 (s, 3H) 1.30-1.59 (m, 2H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₇H₂₀FIN₄O₆, 523; found, 523.

Example 576-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-1,3-dimethyl-2,4-dioxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-pyrimidine-5-carboxylicacid ((S)-2,4-dihydroxy-butoxy)-amide

The title compound was synthesized following a similar proceduredescribed in the synthesis of Example 2 by treatment of compound 2A with04(S)-2-Phenyl-[1,3]dioxan-4-ylmethyl)-hydroxylamine, followed by acidhydrolysis of the resulting material (total yield 87%). ¹H NMR (400 MHz,DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 12.32 (s, 1H) 11.97 (s, 1H) 7.80 (dd, J=10.11, 1.77 Hz,1H) 7.58 (d, J=8.84 Hz, 1H) 7.15 (t, J=8.59 Hz, 1H) 4.90 (d, J=4.29 Hz,1H) 4.38 (t, J=5.05 Hz, 1H) 3.74-3.86 (m, 2H) 3.56-3.66 (m, 1H)3.45-3.53 (m, 2H) 3.21 (s, 3H) 2.96 (s, 3H) 1.35-1.56 (m, 2H). [M+H]calc'd for C₁₇H₂₀FIN₄O₆, 523; found, 523.

Example 586-(2-Fluoro-4-iodo-phenylamino)-5-(3-hydroxy-azetidine-1-carbonyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1H-pyrimidine-2,4-dione

The title compound was synthesized from compound 2A and3-hydroxyazetidine hydrochloride in 52% yield following a similarprocedure described in the synthesis of Example 5. ¹H NMR (400 MHz,DMSO-d₆) δ ppm 8.83 (s, 1H) 7.65 (d, J=9.85 Hz, 1H) 7.52 (d, J=9.60 Hz,1H) 6.90-6.99 (m, 1H) 5.64 (d, J=5.31 Hz, 1H) 4.25-4.34 (m, 1H)3.96-4.04 (m, 1H) 3.69-3.75 (m, 1H) 3.39-3.47 (m, 1H) 3.35 (s, 3H)3.17-3.23 (m, 1H) 3.16 (s, 3H). [M+H] calc'd for C₁₆H₁₆FIN₄O₄, 475;found, 475.

In addition to the foregoing, the above reaction schemes, and variationsthereof, can be used to prepare the following:

Biological Testing

The activity of compounds as MEK inhibitors may be assayed in vitro, invivo or in a cell line. Further, compounds according to the presentinvention may be screened for activity against one or more MEKs.Provided below are assays for activity against MEK1 and ERK1.

Purified MEK1, MEK2 and ERK1 may be obtained as follows.

For MEK1, DNA encoding residues 2-393 (del aa 32-51, S218E/S222D) of thefull-length sequence of the human enzyme may be amplified by PCR andcloned into the BamHI/XbaI sites of pFastbac (Invitrogen), whichincorporates a 6-histidine tag at the N-terminus. The deletion fromresidues 32-51, and the two mutations, S218E and S222D, may be obtainedby quick change PCR. SEQ ID NO: 1 corresponds to residues 2-393, withdeletion from residues 32-51 and mutations S218E/S222D, and with theN-terminal 6-histidine tag. SEQ ID NO: 2 is the DNA sequence that wasused to encode SEQ ID NO: 1.

For MEK2, DNA encoding residues 1-400 (S222E/S226D) of the full-lengthsequence of the human enzyme may be amplified by PCR and cloned intopFastbac (Invitrogen), which incorporates a 6-histidine tag at theN-terminus. The two mutations, S222E and S226D, may be obtained by quickchange PCR. SEQ ID NO: 3 corresponds to residues 1-400 with mutationsS222E/S226D, and with the N-terminal 6-histidine tag and SEQ ID NO: 4 isthe DNA sequence that was used to encode SEQ ID NO: 3.

For ERK1, DNA encoding residues 1-379 of the full-length sequence of thehuman enzyme may be amplified by PCR and cloned into the SmalI/SalIsites of pGEX-6p-3 (GE Healthcare), which incorporates a GST tag at theN-terminus. SEQ ID NO: 5 corresponds to residues 1-379 with theN-terminal GST tag. SEQ ID NO: 6 is the DNA sequence that was used toencode SEQ ID NO: 5.

Recombinant baculovirus incorporating the MEK1 and MEK2 constructs maybe generated by transposition using the Bac-to-Bac system (Invitrogen).High-titer viral stocks may be generated by infection of Spodopterafrugiperda Sf9 cells; the expression of recombinant protein may becarried out by infection of Spodoptera frugiperda Sf9 (Invitrogen) in 5L Wave Bioreactors (Wave Biotech).

Recombinant protein may be isolated from cellular extracts by passageover ProBond resin (Invitrogen). Partially purified extracts of all MEK1may then be further purified by high pressure liquid chromatography overa SEC2000 gel filtration resin. The purity of MEK1 and MEK2 proteins maybe determined on denaturing SDS-PAGE gel. Purified MEK1 and MEK2 maythen be concentrated to a final concentration of 3.4 mg/ml and 5.4mg/ml, respectively. The proteins may be either stored at −78° C. in abuffer containing 50 mM TRIS-HCl pH 7.6, 250 mM NaCl, 0.1 mM EDTA and0.125 mM TCEP or at −20° C. in the presence of glycerol (finalconcentration of glycerol at 50%).

Recombinant protein incorporating the ERK1 constructs may be generatedby transformation of the expression vector into an E. coli strain HD5a(Invitrogen). To express ERK1 protein, the transformated E. coli strainmay be cultured at 37° C. C until OD0.6, and then induced by adding IPTGto final concentration of 0.5 mM, and continue to culture the cellovernight at 25° C.

Recombinant ERK1 protein may be isolated from cellular extracts bypassage over Glutathione (Amersham). Partially purified extracts of ERK1may then be further purified by high pressure liquid chromatography overa BioSep SEC3000 gel filtration resin. The purity of ERK1 protein may bedetermined on denaturing SDS-PAGE gel. Purified ERK1 may then beconcentrated to a final concentration of 1.9 mg/ml. The proteins may beeither stored at −78° C. in a buffer containing 25 mM TRIS-HCl pH 7.6,150 mM NaCl, 1 mM EDTA and 0.25 mM TCEP or at −20° C. in the presence ofglycerol (final concentration of glycerol at 50%).

It should be noted that a variety of other expression systems and hostsare also suitable for the expression of MEK1 and ERK1, as would bereadily appreciated by one of skill in the art.

The inhibitory properties of compounds relative to MEK1 or MEK2 may bedetermined using a black 384-well-plate format under the followingreaction conditions: 50 mM HEPES pH 7.3, 10 mM NaCl, 10 mM MgCl₂, 0.01%Brij35, 1 nM MEK1 or 4 nM MEK2, 25 nM ERK1, 400 μM ATP, 500 nMIPTTPITTYFFFK-5FAM-COOH (FI-Erktide), and 1% DMSO. Reaction product isdetermined quantitatively by fluorescent polarization using progressiveIMAP beads from Molecular Devices.

The assay reaction may be initiated as follows: 2 μl of the mixture of1.5 μM FI-Erktide and 75 nM ERK with 2 μl of inhibitor (2 fold serialdilutions for 11 data points for each inhibitor) containing 3% DMSO wereadded to each well of the plate, followed by the addition of 2 μl of themixture of 3 nM MEK1 or 12 nM MEK2 and 1200 μM ATP to initiate thereaction (final enzyme concentration was 1 nM for MEK1 or 4 nM forMEK2). The reaction mixture may then be incubated at room temperaturefor 22 min, and quenched and developed by addition of 20 μl of 1:200dilution of progressive IMAP beads (Molecular Devices) in 80% buffer A,20% buffer B and 0.003% Tween 20. Fluorescence polarization of theresulting reaction mixtures may be measured after a 1 hour incubation atroom temperature.

IC₅₀ values may be calculated by non-linear curve fitting of thecompound concentrations and fluorescence polarization signal to thestandard IC₅₀ equation. IC₅₀ values for select compounds are given inTable 1.

TABLE 1 IC₅₀ of Exemplified Compounds Against MEK2 EXAMPLE IC₅₀(nM) 2≦500 3 ≦500 4 501-2500 5 501-2500 6 ≦500 9 ≦500 10 501-2500 112501-25000 12 2501-25000 13 2501-25000 14 >25000 15 501-2500 16 ≦500 17501-2500 18 2501-25000 19 2501-25000 20 >25000 21 >25000 22 >25000 25≦500 27 ≦500 28 ≦500 29 501-2500 30 >25000 31 >25000 32 2501-25000 332501-25000 34 2501-25000 35 ≦500 36 501-2500 37 ≦500 38 ≦500 39 ≦50040 >25000 41 >25000 42 501-2500 43 >25000 44 >25000 45 501-250048 >25000 51 >25000 54 501-2500 55 501-2500 56 501-2500 57 ≦500 582501-25000

It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that variousmodifications and variations can be made in the compounds, compositions,kits, and methods of the present invention without departing from thespirit or scope of the invention. Thus, it is intended that the presentinvention cover the modifications and variations of this inventionprovided they come within the scope of the appended claims and theirequivalents.

1-113. (canceled)
 114. A compound of the formula:

wherein X₅ is a leaving group; Q is selected from CR₇R₈, CO and CS; R₃is selected from the group consisting of amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino,alkoxyamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₂₋₁₀)alkyl,halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,(C₁₋₆)oxaalkyl, (C₁₋₄)oxyalkyl(C₁₋₄)oxaalkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl,(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicycloaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,(C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl andhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted; R₄ and R₅are each independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,oxy, hydroxy, carbonyloxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, carbonyl,oxycarbonyl, amino, (C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl,sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,(C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl andhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted, providedthat R₄ and R₅ are each independently absent when the atoms to whichthey are bound form part of a double bond; and R₇ and R₈ are eachindependently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, cyano,heteroaryloxy, carbonyl, oxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, amino,(C₁₋₁₀)alkylamino, sulfonamido, imino, sulfonyl, sulfinyl, (C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,halo(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl, carbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, thiocarbonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl,sulfonyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, sulfinyl(C₁₋₃)alkyl, amino(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,imino(C₁₋₃)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, aryl(C₁₋₁₀)alkyl,heteroaryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl,hetero(C₈₋₁₂)bicyclo aryl(C₁₋₅)alkyl, (C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl,hetero(C₃₋₁₂)cycloalkyl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl, hetero(C₃₋₁₂)bicycloalkyl,(C₄₋₁₂)aryl, hetero(C₁₋₁₀)aryl, (C₉₋₁₂)bicycloaryl andhetero(C₄₋₁₂)bicycloaryl, each substituted or unsubstituted, or R₇ andR₅ are taken together to form a substituted or unsubstituted ring,provided that R₈ is absent when the atom to which it is bound forms partof a double bond.